JP7083739B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set value. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, there is a problem that the setting confirmation work cannot be appropriately executed because it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a setting confirmation work.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a set value change process) capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and
A special variable display means (for example, CPU 103) capable of variablely displaying special identification information (for example, a special symbol) and displaying the variable display result, and
A special variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a special variable display period for variable display of special identification information, and
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol) and derives and displays a display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area.
Ordinary variable time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring an ordinary variable display period for variable display of ordinary identification information, and
The means for adding game value and the means for adding game value,
An information display means (for example, a display monitor) capable of displaying information (for example, a base value) regarding the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state , the setting confirmation state is set. The time measurement of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the special symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the game machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state , the setting confirmation state is set. The time measurement of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted (for example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the normal symbol). Stops the timekeeping of the normal map fluctuation time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and restarts the timekeeping of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).
The information display means can display information about a set value set by the setting means in the setting confirmation state (for example, when the setting confirmation state is controlled, the display of the set value is displayed on the display monitor. Will be done) ,
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the launch of the game medium is restricted , and
The setting means can control the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the setting value.
Specific information that can be identified as being controlled to the setting permission state when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without ending the control of the setting permission state can be stored in the specific information storage means.
The specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased based on the end of the control of the setting permission state.
The information display means displays an error when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and the setting permission state is not controlled. Can be displayed and
When the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the error display is displayed on the information display means when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is controlled to the setting permission state. Without
It is possible to output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when it is controlled to the setting permission state.
It is characterized in that the specific signal can be output when the error display is displayed on the information display means . According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be suitably executed when the setting confirmation is desired to be performed immediately.
(1) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F).
See state control means (eg, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, FIG. 10-2) for controlling one of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state, probable change state) having different advantages for the player. )When,
An motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, a back motion, a specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) that prompts the player to perform the motion detected by the motion detection means (for example, the specific motion).
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, a common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, a control period of a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
It is provided with a suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a final fluctuation suggestion effect in 48FS024 of FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120).
The suggestion means is a specific period during which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, a period during which the result screen is displayed and a valid period from t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9). In, the state in the predetermined period is suggested based on the fact that the movement of the player (for example, the back movement) is detected by the movement detecting means without the promotion notification being performed (for example, FIG. 10-4, (See Figure 10-9),
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. It is characterized by being provided with specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

(2) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F).
An advantageous state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) that controls an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player.
FIG. 5 by a state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a state different from the advantageous state but in any of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) in which the advantage for the player is different from each other. Special symbol process processing, see Fig. 10-2) and
An motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) that prompts the player to perform the motion detected by the motion detection means (for example, the specific motion).
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, the common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, the control period of the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
A suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing a jackpot middle suggestion effect at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7 by the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
In the advantageous state (for example, the second special figure big hit gaming state) controlled in the predetermined period, the suggestion means moves the player by the motion detecting means (for example, a back motion) without performing the promotion notification. ) Is detected, suggesting the state in the predetermined period (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. It is characterized by being provided with specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

(3) A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F).
An advantageous state control means (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) that controls an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player.
FIG. 5 by a state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a state different from the advantageous state but in any of a plurality of types of states (for example, non-probable change state and probable change state) in which the advantage for the player is different from each other. Special symbol process processing, see Fig. 10-2) and
An motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a player's motion (for example, back motion, specific motion), and
The promotion notification means (for example, the process of executing the promotion notification by the effect control CPU 120) that prompts the player to perform the motion detected by the motion detection means (for example, the specific motion).
Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, the common effect common to the plurality of types of states is applied over a predetermined period (for example, the control period of the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state). A common effect execution means to be executed (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and
Suggestion means for suggesting any of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing the final fluctuation suggestion effect at 48F024 in FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120, and a jackpot middle suggestion effect at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7). With the process to be executed)
The suggestion means
During the specific period in which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, the period during which the result screen is displayed and the valid period from t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9), the promotion notification is given. Based on the fact that the movement of the player (for example, the back movement) is detected by the movement detecting means, the first suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (for example, FIG. 10-4, (See Figure 10-9),
In the advantageous state (for example, the second special figure big hit gaming state) controlled in the predetermined period, the movement of the player (for example, the back movement) was detected by the movement detecting means without performing the promotion notification. Based on this, a second suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. It is characterized by being provided with specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b).

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above
A player's motion (for example, a back motion) detected by the motion detecting means when the first suggestion is made, and a player's motion detected by the motion detecting means when the second suggestion is made. The content of the operation (for example, long press of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A) is common to (for example, the back operation).

According to such a configuration, the operation content for state suggestion does not change regardless of the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state, so that the operation for state suggestion becomes complicated. This can be prevented as much as possible.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above,
The execution mode of the first suggestion (for example, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation) and the execution mode of the second suggestion (for example, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect during the big hit) are some aspects (for example, the speaker). While the 8L and 8R audio outputs are different, other aspects (for example, the lighting color of the board lamp 48F050) are common (see, for example, FIG. 10-8).

According to such a configuration, since a part of the execution mode of the state suggestion differs depending on the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state, the state suggestion is appropriately performed according to the situation. be able to.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above
The suggestion means
When the first suggestion (for example, the suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation) is performed, the first suggestion portion (for example, the board lamp 48F050) is used, but the second suggestion portion (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R) is not used (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R). For example, see FIGS. 10-8 (A) and 10-9),
When the second suggestion (for example, the suggestion effect during a big hit) is performed, the first suggestion part (for example, the board lamp 48F050) and the second suggestion part (for example, the speakers 8L and 8R) are used (for example, FIG. 10-8 (for example). B), see Fig. 10-11).

According to such a configuration, the number of suggestion portions used for the state suggestion differs depending on the situation when the player causes the gaming machine to suggest the state. Therefore, the state suggestion is appropriately made according to the situation. It can be carried out.

(7) In any of the above (1) and (3) to (6) gaming machines.
When the control to the advantageous state is determined in the specific period (for example, when the jackpot fluctuates) and the player's motion (for example, back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means in the specific period. Advantageous notification means for notifying control to the advantageous state in a mode different from the execution mode of the suggestion by the suggestion means (for example, a process of executing a big hit effect during back operation with 48FS025 in FIG. 10-4 by the effect control CPU 120). (See, for example, FIG. 10-10).

According to such a configuration, when the control to the advantageous state is determined, the player performs an action for suggesting the state to notify the control to the advantageous state, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (7) above,
Further provided with a common effect determining means (for example, a process of determining a common effect based on the player's selection by the effect control CPU 120) for determining the type of the common effect by the player's selection.
Among the common effects, the above suggestion is obtained in the case where the first common effect (for example, common effect A) is determined by the common effect determining means and the case where the second common effect (for example, common effect B) is determined. While some aspects (eg, audio output of the speakers 8L, 8R) in the suggestion by means are different, other aspects (eg, lighting color of the board lamp 48F050) are common (see, for example, FIG. 10-8 (B)). ).

According to such a configuration, since a part of the execution mode of the state suggestion is different depending on the type of the common effect selected by the player, the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following (9). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-131768 (paragraph 0132, FIG. 47), all the detected abnormal history information related to the game can be identifiable and displayed. There was something that memorized error information and made it possible to check it on the error information history screen. The above-mentioned conventional gaming machine cannot suitably store information, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing information.

(9) A gaming machine capable of playing a game, based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a gaming ball has won a prize in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). A profit-giving means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) controls the game to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game) is provided, and the specific conditions are at least predetermined conditions. It can be established based on the fact that it is satisfied (for example, it is a probable change jackpot), and if the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is specified that the specific condition is not satisfied. It is characterized by being provided with specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) that can store possible specific information (for example, log information of a probability change failure date and time). According to such a configuration, information can be suitably stored.

(10) In the gaming machine of the above (9), the profit-giving means can give a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49, the log information of "setting suggestion failure". It may be configured to record 012IW109a and log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure"). According to such a configuration, information can be suitably stored.

(11) In the gaming machine of the above (9) or (10), the specific information display means capable of recognizablely displaying the specific information (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is executed by executing step 012IWS464, FIG. 11 As shown in -40 (C), the log information of probability change failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen, and as shown in FIGS. 11-49, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" is displayed on the maintenance history screen. It may be configured to include log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure"). With such a configuration, information can be suitably displayed.

(12) In any of the game machines (9) to (11) above, the two-dimensional code output means capable of outputting information including specific information as a two-dimensional code (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is in step 012IWS518. , S519 may be configured to generate and display a two-dimensional code including log information of the probability change failure date and time). According to such a configuration, information can be suitably output.

(13) In any of the game machines (9) to (12) above, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player. A game machine that can be set to a set value, and has a storage area (for example, RAM 102) that can store information generated during the game, and history storage that can store abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game. Initialization process that can execute means (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS464, S467 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) and an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage area (for example, RAM clear 1). Execution means (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS051 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and a setting change process for changing a setting value when the initialization process is executed (for example, a setting change process (specifically, a portion for executing step 012IWS051)). For example, the history display means includes a setting change processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS034 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the setting change processing). When the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to identify and display that the initialization process has been executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS809). Then, by executing step 012IWS464, the log information of RAM clear is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-41 (E)), and when the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the initialization process is performed. It is possible to display that the setting change process has been executed without displaying that the execution has been performed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step 012IWS811 to perform step 012IWS464). By executing this, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (D), only the log information indicating the end of the setting change may be displayed). According to such a configuration, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm.

(14) In any of the game machines (9) to (13) above, a first abnormality (for example, a first left-handed notification state) and a second abnormality (for example, a second abnormality having a higher importance than the first abnormality). An abnormality detecting means (for example, a portion in which steps 012IWS107 and S111 are executed in the second effect control CPU012IW120b) capable of detecting the second left-handed notification state) and a history storage means (for example) capable of storing the history information of the abnormality related to the game. For example, the log area of RAM012IW122b) and the history display means capable of identifiablely displaying the history information stored in the history storage means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b) by executing step 012IWS464, FIG. 11-40. And, as shown in FIGS. 11-41, a maintenance history screen is displayed), and the history storage means indicates that the second abnormality is detected when the second abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means. While the information is stored as history information, when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the information indicating that the first abnormality is detected is not stored as the history information (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). , Step 012IWS117 may be configured to record log information only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and not record log information even when the first left-handed notification state occurs). .. According to such a configuration, history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

(15) In any of the game machines (9) to (14) above, based on information from a predetermined control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and a predetermined control means. A specific control means for controlling (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided, and the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, for the second effect control). The CPU012IW120b stores the date and time information in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b every 100 ms by executing steps 012IWS842 to S844), and the power output by the predetermined control means when the power supply to the specific control means is started). A power failure date / time storage means that can store the temporarily stored date / time as the power failure date / time based on the input of information that can identify that the supply has started (for example, initialization specification command, recovery command). (For example, a portion of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b for executing step 012IWS847) may be included. According to such a configuration, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

(16) In any of the game machines (9) to (15) above, a second control means that controls based on information from the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a) and the first control means. A control means (for example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided, and the first control means provides a plurality of information regarding the change of the date and time for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of 10 ms). The second control means sequentially outputs to the control means (for example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a transmits an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day signal in order), and the second control means After a specific period of time equal to or longer than a predetermined period has elapsed since the input of a part of the information regarding the change of the date and time, the change history of the date and time is stored (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has steps 012IWS826 to By executing S836, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, it may be configured to wait until 500 ms have elapsed after receiving the time signal and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). According to such a configuration, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the staging control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C). ) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device when it recovers from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the operation-related setting process during variable display performed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display middle-back motion detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation detection processing during variable display performed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the operation-related setting processing during a big hit executed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle-back operation detection process performed by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a figure which shows the table for determining the execution pattern of the suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a timing chart showing an example of the effect when the pachinko machine related to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the change of the 100th time saving / electric support (when the loss is changed). It is a timing chart showing an example of the effect when the pachinko machine related to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the 100th change of the time saving / electric support (when the big hit fluctuates). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the effect at the time of the back operation in the 2nd special figure big hit game state in the pachinko game machine which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a figure which shows the table for deciding the practice pattern of the setting suggestion in the pachinko gaming machine of the modification which concerns on a feature part 48F. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 012IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 012IW. It is a flow chart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 012IW. It is a flow chart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 012IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing in a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table, the character effect effect decision table, and the light guide plate effect decision table in a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows maintenance mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change time recording process. It is a flowchart which shows the present time setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting timing of the present time. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure date and time recording processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of a display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of a display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of a display screen in maintenance mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific example of a display screen in maintenance mode. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a gaming machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modification 4.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per ordinary figure", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained and a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is performed. It may be turned on / off, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the effect mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and information of probability fluctuation (information indicating the number of times of probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect process ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.) can also be applied to the present invention.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to suitably notify the setting state. There was a problem. The following is a proposal for a gaming machine according to the invention 207SG that solves such a problem. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that it is not possible to suitably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. The following is a proposal for a gaming machine according to the invention 208SG that solves such a problem. Further, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are individually provided. The following is a proposal for a gaming machine according to the invention 209SG that solves such a problem. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 207SG, the invention 208SG, and the invention 209SG are represented as the feature unit 207SG. The feature unit 207SG is applicable to the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game hall clerk into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and a player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the game board. The right side of the image display device 5 in No. 2 is formed in the right gaming area 207SG002R where the gaming ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main board 11 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG 201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 207 SG 201 so that the board case 207 SG 201 can be operated without opening the board case 207 SG 201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 207SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment has a position. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Instrument 207SG025A, 2nd hold display 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 207SG that lights up in the probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variation display result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type to display the variation display result. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the variation with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory. In the unit 207SG, the light is turned off toward the left side).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding storages (only the LED at the left end of the first holding indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 due to the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold storage is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment includes the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display or the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332, which can detect the presence of the sensor, is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332.

FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special diagram in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) is determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (staging control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip computer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIGS. 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and also varies. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is In that case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set so that the jackpot expectation that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-10, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. If the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to obtain a fluctuation pattern that results in super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -11 (C), the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), and the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-12 (B) ( Set value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 8-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), FIG. 8-13 ( In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure. A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) is included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are explanatory views showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the gaming state is a probable change state ( In the high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit gaming state may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Setting value 4> Setting value 3> Setting value 2> Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. 8-12. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 8-12 (A) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Shows the probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 has the display results shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table, but whether to set a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table separately for each set value and make the variation display result a big hit. It may be determined individually whether or not it is a small hit.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-13 (A) and 8-13 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-13 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-14. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The big hit game state by "B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control is executed and the jackpot C, the ratio for determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control is executed and the jackpot C, the ratio for determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although it is included, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game is not limited to this, and the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits, which is used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss, which is used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss", are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C is prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and the jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) includes the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 380 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", 1 to 180 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 140 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 120 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 101 to 350 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than that and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the variation for loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 430 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 390 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 370 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 350 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 480 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 440 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total reserved storage number of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 530 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 510 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 470 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", 1 to 530 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 510 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 470 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is exemplified. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-16 (A) to 8-16 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the embodiment for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved storage number in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss, which differs depending on the number of reserved storages of the special symbol and the number of pending storages of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is the fluctuation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed by a pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-tested area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (B) and 8-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 ball in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can specify the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without executing the setting value changing process described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value change processing described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value change processing) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear process for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa014c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed). 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the staging control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall or the like (the pachinko game is played while operating the clear switch with the game machine frame 207SG003 opened and the lock switch 207SG051 turned on. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the staging control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGsa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGSa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 is interrupted periodically at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the staging control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the power is restored from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment has the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, a clerk at a game hall or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clearing process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGsa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of 207SGSa042 and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is assigned an address (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) store game information including special figure hold storage, normal figure hold storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold display. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is not any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (set value is reset to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). When any value 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 in the RAM 102 is based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", "2", which is a setting value one step more advantageous to the player than the "1", is set as a temporary setting value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value 1 larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGsa065. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or tentative set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGsa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the provisional set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is changed to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the provisional set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 sends a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold display. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode that is not any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 sends a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power-off detection process execution start wait timer (207SGSa105) for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed. ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes a power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the set value change process described above.

After executing the power cutoff detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are terminated. All segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command (207SGSa115) to the effect control board 12, and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B, and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, second. By starting the blinking of the hold display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can see the pachinko machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only the LED of No. 1 is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment responds to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) to 8-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 8-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. (Clear switch is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A), 8-25 (B), and 8-25 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned off by turning off the power. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIGS. 8-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-28, the CPU 103 executed the same power supply cutoff detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

The invention 207SG has been described above by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 207SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be made (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
When the set state is set, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on).
According to this feature, it is notified in the information display unit where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, so that suitable notification can be performed.

Further, the invention 208SG has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 208SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be made (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (B)). If an error occurs above the set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
According to this feature, in the variable display area where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, it is notified by the display that a predetermined error has occurred even if a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although a specific condition is satisfied.

Further, the invention 209SG has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 209SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIGS. 8-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc.) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value-giving means (for example, FIG. 8-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying an value) and
Equipped with
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit The part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, so that it is not necessary to individually provide the display means for displaying the set value information. , The cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Although the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold display device 207SG025A, a second hold display device 207SG025B, and the like. The present invention exemplifies a form composed of a design display 207SG020, a normal drawing hold display 207SG025C, a round display 207SG131, a right-handed lamp 207SG132, a probability variation lamp 207SG133, and a time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, there are cases where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state). Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. Depending on the case and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or blinked in different modes. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not there is.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on. 1 Display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The present invention is not limited to this, but the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is illustrated. If the display mode is different from the display mode in which the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol is displayed. It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Although the embodiment in which one segment is lit and all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinking is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. For blinking of all segments, it may not be executed or only a part of it may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The machine 1 may not be equipped with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body is formed. A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, and the second hold display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display constituting the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, and the second hold display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed. As a process, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, and the second hold display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An example is exemplified in a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, and the second hold display device A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

[Explanation of feature section 10F]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of multiple stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting values. there were. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference). However, in the case of a gaming machine such as JP-A-2010-20092, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. The gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F that solve such a problem are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F will be represented as the feature unit 10F. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above. The feature unit 10F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above together with the feature unit 207SG.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing a set value change process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-1, the same processing as in FIG. 8-22 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 8-20, the RAM clear process was executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in the 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. The feature unit 10F will be described on the premise that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). After that, the same processing as that shown in FIG. 8-22 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes a game stop end process (10FS002) after executing a process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same processing as that shown in FIG. 8-22 is executed.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 9-2, the same processing as in FIG. 8-23 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, the same processing as that shown in FIG. 8-23 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off (207SGSa111; N) in the 207SGSa111, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 9-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, the same processing as that shown in FIG. 8-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state of the big winning door to the closing state by the attacker opening time timer. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability-changing gaming machine that controls the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable-changing state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is controlled in the open state and the closed state, which is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change. In the V probability variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. The area where the V lid is open is called the V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state of the V-cover to the closing state by the V-cover opening time timer. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed from the open state (winning in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also determined to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is effectively determined by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to be in the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is the period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As the timer other than the above-mentioned timer, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker open time timer is operating in the game stop start process (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the start port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker open time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-cover opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timer that is stopped is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process is terminated.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the start port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part 10F)
As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is set. The timekeeping of the period of the interval period timer between rounds is restarted based on the end. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the valid period of the V prize in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 has a valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The timekeeping is stopped, and the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation status, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirmation state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The timekeeping of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time measurement of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the feature unit 10F)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.

We have described a gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols (so-called first-class gaming machine), but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on a gaming ball winning (V-winning) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a gaming machine (a type-two-type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled by the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is accepted by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class big hit game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 and type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is completed. , The timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4, even if the same control is executed even in the setting change state. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting change state when it is in a state advantageous to the player, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timekeeping.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result or an off display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped because the jackpot display result, which is in an advantageous state for the player, is disadvantageous to the player, but the timer is stopped because it is not disadvantageous to the player regarding the off-display result. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, if the setting confirmation state is reached when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

The invention 10F has been described above by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 10F is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value changing process). The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation status.)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, the invention 11F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 11F is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value changing process). The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 41) and derives and displays a display result. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in a state where the entry is possible, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the normally variable winning means is in a state where the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

Further, the invention 12F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 12F is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variablely display the identification information and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value changing process). The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring an execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting. (Resume timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the information from being lost.

Further, the invention 13F has been described by exemplifying the feature portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to the invention 13F is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value changing process). The part to be executed) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which setting value is set, and
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variablely displays ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol) and derives a display result based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, a passage gate 41).
It is equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 that clocks by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. (Resumes the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation status)
According to this feature, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

[Explanation of feature 48F]
In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines that can be controlled into a plurality of types of states and that perform a common effect common to the plurality of types of states regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled (for example). , JP-A-2010-5141). In this gaming machine, while performing an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation buttons, when the operation buttons are operated by the player, the state under control is suggested, and the operation is performed. The execution ratio of the effect is designed to be different depending on the state under control. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the player can predict the state of being controlled to some extent without operating the operation button by using the execution frequency of the operation effect as a clue, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is lowered. The gaming machine according to the invention 48F that solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machine according to the invention 48F will be referred to as the feature unit 48F. The feature portion 48F can be applied to the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 together with the feature portion 10F and the feature portion 207SG.

(Specifications of pachinko gaming machine related to feature 48F)
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine are set so that the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change is 1/320, the jackpot probability at the time of probability change is 1/55, and the probability variation ratio is 75%. There is. The spec values shown in FIG. 10-1 (A) are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change or the time of probability change may be changeable according to the set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in the pachinko gaming machine, a first special figure game using the first special figure (for example, the special figure in the above-mentioned first special symbol display device 207SG004A) occurs. The types (hereinafter referred to as "first special figure jackpot") include jackpot types A to D. The jackpot type A is a jackpot type corresponding to an 8R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is a set of 7 symbols (777). The jackpot type B is a jackpot type corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an odd-numbered symbol set other than the 7 symbols (for example, 333). The jackpot type C is a jackpot type corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols (for example, 222). The jackpot type D is a jackpot type corresponding to a 3R normal jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an even numbered symbol as in the jackpot type C (for example, 222).

As described above, the jackpot types A to C all correspond to the probability variation jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the high probability high base state. In the jackpot types A to C, the probability variation state after the jackpot ends in a so-called number cut, and the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as "ST (special time) number of times") is set to 100 times. On the other hand, the jackpot type D corresponds to a normal jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a low accuracy high base state.

In all of the jackpot types A to D, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to the time saving state, and the number of fluctuations in the time saving state is set to 100 times. Furthermore, in all of the big hit types A to D, in the short time state after the big hit, the opening frequency and the number of times of opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called electric tulip) are increased or the opening time of one time is lengthened. The so-called "electric tulip support control" (hereinafter referred to as "electric support") is performed to facilitate the winning of the special variable winning ball device 7. In all of the jackpot types A to D, the number of fluctuations in which the electric support is performed after the jackpot is also set to 100 times.

Of the jackpot types A to D, the jackpot type A is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the other jackpot types B to D in that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is large, and the ratio selected at the time of a jackpot is the jackpot type A to. It is the lowest 2% of D. In the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D, the ratio selected at the time of the jackpot is the same, and the ratio is 25%. The ratio value shown in FIG. 10-1 (B) is an example and can be changed as appropriate, but the selection ratio of the jackpot type A is lower than that of the other jackpot types B to D, and the jackpot type C and the jackpot type C and the jackpot. It is preferable that the selection ratio is the same as that of the type D.

Here, in the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D, the jackpot symbols are both the same even-numbered symbols, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is also the same 3R, and the time saving state and the control to the electric support are both. The same 100 times. Further, as will be described later, regardless of whether the jackpot type C or the jackpot type D is determined, the effect in the game state after the jackpot is common. That is, the jackpot type C and the jackpot type D differ only depending on whether or not the internal state changes probable after the jackpot game state, and there is no difference in appearance from the other players. Therefore, when a big hit is determined by either the big hit type C or the big hit type D, it is extremely difficult for the player to determine whether the big hit is a probabilistic big hit or a normal big hit.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), in the pachinko gaming machine, a second special figure game using the second special figure (for example, the special figure in the above-mentioned second special symbol display device 207SG004B) occurs. The types (hereinafter referred to as "second special figure jackpot") include jackpot types E to H. The jackpot type E is a jackpot type corresponding to a 16R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is a set of 7 symbols (777). The jackpot type F is a jackpot type corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an odd-numbered symbol set other than the 7 symbols (for example, 333). The jackpot type G is a jackpot type corresponding to the 3R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols (for example, 222). The jackpot type H is a jackpot type corresponding to a 3R normal jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is an even-numbered symbol as in the jackpot type G (for example, 222).

As described above, the jackpot types E to H all correspond to the probability variation jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes the high probability high base state. In the big hit types E to G, the number of STs in the probable change state after the big hit is set to 100 times. On the other hand, the jackpot type H corresponds to a normal jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a low accuracy high base state.

In all of the jackpot types E to H, the gaming state after the jackpot is controlled to the time saving state, but the number of fluctuations in the time saving state is set to 100 times, and the number of fluctuations in which the electric support is performed is also set to 100 times. There is.

Of the jackpot types E to H, the jackpot type E is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the other jackpot types F to H in that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is large, and the ratio selected at the time of a jackpot is the jackpot type E to. It is the highest 50% of H. The ratio value shown in FIG. 10-1 (C) is an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the selection ratio may be the same for the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H.

Here, in the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H, the jackpot symbols are both the same even-numbered symbols, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is also the same 3R, and the time saving state and the control to the electric support are also both. The same 100 times. Further, as will be described later, regardless of whether the jackpot type G or the jackpot type H is determined, the effect in the game state after the jackpot is common. That is, the jackpot type G and the jackpot type H differ only depending on whether or not the internal state changes probable after the jackpot gaming state, and there is no difference in appearance from the other players. Therefore, when a big hit is determined by either the big hit type G or the big hit type H, it is extremely difficult for the player to determine whether the big hit is a probabilistic big hit or a normal big hit.

(Transition of game state)
FIG. 10-2 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F, the gaming states controlled by the CPU 103 include a normal state, a first special figure jackpot gaming state, a high accuracy high base state, and a low. The accuracy base state and the second special figure big hit game state are included.

When the first special figure big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the first special figure big hit gaming state. The first special figure jackpot game state is controlled by the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the first special figure jackpot that has occurred (various types of FIG. 10-1 (B)), during which the player hits right. Allows a game ball to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

After the first special figure big hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state according to the type of the generated first special figure big hit. Specifically, when the generated first special figure jackpot is either an 8R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type A, a 3R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type B, or a 3R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type C. Is controlled to a high accuracy and high base state. On the other hand, when the generated first special figure jackpot is a 3R normal jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type D, it is controlled to a low accuracy and high base state.

In both the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, the player can select the effect (background effect, reach effect, notice effect, etc.), and the effect that can be selected by the player is high accuracy. It is common to the high base state and the low accuracy high base state. That is, since the effects performed in the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state are common, the player decides which of the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state is. It is extremely difficult to distinguish the production from the clues. In the present embodiment, as a common effect, a common effect A in which a male character appears as the main character and a common effect B in which a female character appears as the main character are provided, and the player selects one of the effects. It is possible.

In the high-accuracy high-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the player can start the second special figure game by hitting right. When the second special figure game is started and the second special figure big hit occurs in the second special figure game, the state shifts to the second special figure big hit gaming state. The second special figure jackpot game state is controlled by the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the second special figure jackpot that has occurred (various types in FIG. 10-1 (C)), during which the player hits right. Allows a game ball to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

After the second special figure big hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state according to the type of the generated second special figure big hit. Specifically, when the generated second special figure jackpot is either a 16R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type E, an 8R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type F, or a 3R probability variable jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type G. Is controlled to a high accuracy and high base state. On the other hand, when the generated second special figure jackpot is a 3R normal jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type H, it is controlled to a low accuracy and high base state.

If the second special figure game is started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state and the second special figure big hit occurs in the second special figure game, the state is again in the second special figure big hit gaming state. Will migrate. In this case, it becomes a so-called consecutive villa state. On the other hand, if the second special figure game cannot be started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state, the state shifts to the normal state. Although not shown, the first is when the first special figure game is started in the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state and the first special figure jackpot occurs in the first special figure game. The state shifts to the special figure jackpot game state.

(Main processing related to feature 48F)
As mentioned above, when the first special figure jackpot occurs with even-numbered symbols and then the state shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state, or when the even-numbered symbols are aligned and the second special figure jackpot occurs. If the state shifts to a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state due to the occurrence of Is extremely difficult to distinguish. Therefore, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F executes a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a probable change state by pressing and holding the trigger button of the stick controller 31A within a predetermined valid period. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the long press on the trigger button of the stick controller 31A for executing the suggestion effect is not prompted by the player, and only a known player can press and hold the trigger button. Also called "operation".

The main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-3 to 10-8.

(Operation-related setting processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing a variable display operation-related setting process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The operation-related setting process during variable display is a process included in the variable display start setting process (S171) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control command output from the main board 11, and the variation to be performed from now on is a variation in which the time reduction and the number of times of control of the electric support are 100 times (hereinafter, this). It is determined whether or not such a fluctuation is (referred to as "final fluctuation") (48FS001). If the effect control CPU 120 is not the final fluctuation (48FS001; NO), the operation-related setting process during variable display is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is the final variation (48FS001; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display pattern of the result screen (48FS002). The result screen shows the result of the game in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as the number of big hits since the first special figure big hit occurred, the number of acquired game balls associated therewith, and the number of times the continuous villa state is continued. It is a screen. The result screen is a part of the common effect, and is displayed in a mode common to the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state. The effect control CPU 120 determines the display content, display timing, and the like of the result screen in the process of 48FS002.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is a jackpot variation based on the effect control command (48FS003). When the final variation is not the jackpot variation (48FS003; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final variation (48FS004). The suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation is a suggestion effect performed only when the back operation is performed when the final variation of the special symbol is not the jackpot variation.

Here, the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8 (A). FIG. 10-8 is a diagram showing a table for determining an execution pattern of the suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation is the jackpot that is the suggestion target regardless of the type of the common effect that is executed in the state after the jackpot that is the suggestion target (current state). Only the lighting color of the lamp differs depending on whether the later state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. As the lamp in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-9 described later, a board surface lamp 48F050 imitating a character provided on the game board surface is applied.

When the common effect A is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the state after the big hit to be suggested is the low accuracy high base state, while the state after the big hit to be suggested is. In the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red. When the common effect B is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the state after the big hit to be suggested is the low accuracy high base state, while the state after the big hit to be suggested is. In the high accuracy and high base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red. In both the common effect A and the common effect B, no voice suggestion is performed in the final variation suggestion effect.

As described above, in the final variation suggestion effect, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, when the final variation is the jackpot variation (48FS003; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot effect flag indicating the jackpot variation to ON (48F005). The effect control CPU 120 determines an execution pattern of the jackpot effect during back operation (48FS006). The big hit effect at the time of back operation is an effect that is performed only when the final change of the special symbol is a big hit change and the final change is a big hit change within the valid period, and the symbol is stopped. It is a jackpot production that suggests to the player before the final result is obtained.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the resurrection jackpot effect (48FS007). The resurrection jackpot effect is an effect performed when the final variation of the special symbol is a jackpot variation, and suggests to the player that the final variation is a jackpot variation when the final result is obtained by stopping the symbol. It is a big hit production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of back motion detection after the processing of 48FS004 or the processing of 48FS007 (48FS008). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of back motion detection based on the display timing of the result screen determined in the process of 48FS002. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 starts counting the valid period at the timing when the display of the result screen starts, and ends the counting of the valid period at the timing before the timing when the display of the result screen ends. Set the validity period so that it does. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation-related setting process during variable display.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a display pattern of the result screen and an execution pattern of the suggestion effect at the time of the final change as a preliminary preparation before starting the final change in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit. , Execution pattern of big hit effect at the time of back operation, execution pattern of revival big hit effect, and valid period of back operation detection.

The effect control CPU 120 may execute the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect and the execution pattern of the back operation jackpot effect in the variable display middle-back operation detection process described later. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution pattern of the final variation suggestion effect when the back motion is detected in the variable display middle-back motion detection process, if it is not a jackpot fluctuation, or the jackpot variation In some cases, the execution pattern of the jackpot effect during the back operation may be determined.

(Variable display middle back motion detection process)
FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing a variable display middle-back motion detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The variable display middle back operation detection process is a process included in the variable display middle effect process (S172) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the back operation is detected (48FS021). When the staging control CPU 120 does not detect the back motion (48FS021; NO), the staging control CPU 120 ends the back motion detection process during variable display. On the other hand, when the staging control CPU 120 detects the back operation (48FS021; YES), it determines whether or not it is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022). If the effect control CPU 120 is not within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022; NO), the variable display operation detection process ends.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS022; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS023). When the jackpot effect flag is not set to ON (48FS023; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes a suggestion effect at the time of final fluctuation (48FS024). On the other hand, when the big hit effect flag is set to ON (48FS023; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit effect during the back operation (48FS025). After the processing of 48FS024 or the processing of 48FS025, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display middle-back operation detection process.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a back motion within the valid period in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, the final fluctuation is not the big hit fluctuation. Executes the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation, and executes the jackpot effect at the time of the back operation when the final fluctuation is the jackpot fluctuation.

(Specific motion detection processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing a specific motion detection process during variable display executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The variable display specific operation detection process is a process included in the variable display effect process (S172) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not a specific operation has been detected (48FS041). The specific operation is an operation by the player, and in the present embodiment, the player presses and holds the trigger button of the stick controller 31A. The player is urged to perform a specific action by the promotion notification. For example, a character image of "press and hold the trigger" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The specific operation is not limited to the long press on the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, but may be a continuous press of the trigger button, a long press or continuous press of the push button 31B, or a single operation thereof. Further, when a sensor for non-contactly detecting the movement of the player's hand or the like is provided, the suggestion effect may be executed when the sensor detects the movement of the player's hand or the like. Further, not limited to the movement of the player's body, the voice emitted by the player may be detected by the microphone, or the line of sight of the player may be detected by eye tracking. Further, the specific operation may be the same operation as the back operation, or may be an operation different from the back operation.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not detected a specific operation (48FS041; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific operation detection process during variable display. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a specific operation (48FS041; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot effect flag is set to ON (48FS042). When the big hit effect flag is not set to ON (48FS042; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific operation detection process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the big hit effect flag is set to ON (48FS042; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the promotion notification is executed (48FS043). The promotion notification is performed in the final variation and is a notification that prompts the player to perform a specific operation. The staging control CPU 120 ends the variable display specific operation detection process when the promotion notification is not executed (48FS043; NO), that is, when the specific operation is performed by the player without executing the promotion notification. do.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the resurrection jackpot effect when the promotion notification is executed (48FS043; YES), that is, when the player is prompted to execute the promotion notification and a specific operation is performed (the effect control CPU 120). 48FS044). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display during specific operation detection process when the promotion notification is not executed (48FS043; NO) or after the process of 48FS044.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 detects a specific operation after the promotion notification is executed in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, the final fluctuation is the big hit fluctuation. If it is, the revival jackpot production is executed.

(Operation-related setting processing during big hit)
FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation-related setting process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The big hit middle operation related setting process is a process included in the big hit middle effect process (S176) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start of the third round in the second special figure big hit game state based on the effect control command output from the main board 11. (48FS061). When the effect control CPU 120 is at the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot gaming state (48FS061; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect (48FS062). The jackpot suggestion effect is a suggestion effect performed only during the second special figure jackpot game state.

Here, the execution pattern of the suggestion effect during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 10-8 (B). As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the suggestion effect during the big hit is the suggestion target regardless of the type of the common effect executed in the state of the suggestion target (the state in which the second special figure big hit occurs). The lighting color of the lamp differs depending on whether the state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. As the lamp in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-11 described later, a board surface lamp 48F050 imitating a character provided on the game board surface is applied. That is, the lamp used in the jackpot suggestion effect is the same as the lamp used in the final fluctuation suggestion effect. Furthermore, the big hit medium suggestion effect depends on the type of common effect that was executed in the suggestion target state and whether the suggestion target state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state. The sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is different.

When the common effect A is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the suggestion target state is the low accuracy high base state, and the "normal" voice is output while the sound is output. When the state to be suggested is the high-accuracy high-base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red, and the voice of "hot" is output. When the common effect B is selected by the player, the lamp lighting color is determined to be blue when the suggested state is the low accuracy high base state, and the voice of "normal" is output while the sound is output. When the state to be suggested is the high-accuracy high-base state, the lamp lighting color is determined to be red, and the voice of "hot trap" is output.

As described above, in the jackpot suggestion effect, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected, while the state is changed. The mode of voice when suggesting is different.

Further, the execution pattern of the final fluctuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) and the execution pattern of the jackpot middle suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) differ in the presence or absence of audio output, while the lamp. The lighting color is common. Specifically, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect. , Board lamp 48F050 and speakers 8L, 8R both suggest the condition.

Returning to FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 sets the valid period of the back motion detection when it is not the start of the third round in the second special figure big hit game state (48FS061; NO) or after the processing of 48FS062. (48FS063). For example, the effect control CPU 120 starts counting the valid period at the timing when the third round in the second special figure big hit game state starts, and is effective at the timing before the timing when the second special figure big hit game state ends. Set the validity period to end the period counting. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation-related setting process during the big hit.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution pattern of the jackpot inviting effect and the valid period of the back motion detection at the start of the third round in the second special figure jackpot game state.

(Big hit middle back motion detection process)
FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing a jackpot middle-back operation detection process executed by the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F. The big hit middle back operation detection process is a process included in the big hit middle effect process (S176) of FIG. 7 executed by the effect control CPU 120.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the back operation is detected (48FS081). When the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the back operation (48FS081; NO), the big hit middle back operation detection process ends. On the other hand, when the staging control CPU 120 detects the back operation (48FS081; YES), it determines whether or not it is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082). If the effect control CPU 120 is not within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082; NO), the big hit middle back operation detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 is within the valid period of the back operation (48FS082; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot suggestion effect (48FS083). After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the jackpot middle-back operation detection process.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot suggestion effect when the back motion is detected within the valid period in the second special figure jackpot game state.

(Example of implementation of suggestion production at the time of final change)
FIG. 10-9 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the 100th change of time saving / electric support (when the loss is changed). In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-9, a line indicating the start or stop of the variable display in the final fluctuation, a line indicating whether or not the common effect is executed (ON: executing, OFF: not executing), and a valid period A line indicating the presence / absence (ON: within the valid period, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating the presence / absence of detection of the back operation (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-9 can be applied to both the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, after the variable display in the final fluctuation starts at t1, the display of the result screen starts at t2. Specifically, after "0 times" is displayed as the number of big hits and "0" is displayed as the number of acquisitions, these numbers are added and updated by counting up and displayed. Then, the valid period starts at the timing when the display of the result screen starts at t2. As described above, since the start of the valid period coincides with the start of the display of the result screen, the player can recognize the start timing of the valid period by displaying the result screen.

When the back motion is detected at t3 within the valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. It should be noted that the promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. In the final variation suggestion effect, the board lamp 48F050 is turned on according to the execution pattern shown in FIG. 10-8 (A). No sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The validity period ends at t4 before the display of the result screen ends. After that, at t5, the variable display in the final fluctuation is stopped and the common effect ends, and the final result (in this example, 3 big hits and 3500 acquisitions) is displayed on the result screen. After that, the state shifts to the normal state.

In this way, when the final fluctuation is a loss fluctuation in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the big hit, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without the promotion notification being performed. By executing the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation, it is suggested whether or not the state after the big hit was a probable change state.

(Example of big hit production)
FIG. 10-10 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the 100th change of time saving / electric support (when the big hit fluctuates). In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-10, a line indicating the start or stop of the variable display in the final fluctuation, a line indicating whether or not the common effect is executed (ON: executing, OFF: not executing), and a valid period A line indicating the presence / absence (ON: within the valid period, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating the presence / absence of detection of the back operation (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-10 can be applied to both the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, after the variable display in the final fluctuation starts at t11, the display of the result screen starts at t12. Specifically, after "0 times" is displayed as the number of big hits and "0" is displayed as the number of acquisitions, these numbers are added and updated by counting up and displayed. Then, the valid period starts at the timing when the display of the result screen starts at t12.

When the back operation is detected at t13 within the valid period, the big hit effect during the back operation is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. It should be noted that the promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. The jackpot effect during the back operation is suggested in advance in a manner different from the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot middle suggestion effect. Specifically, in the big hit effect during back operation, the sound of "Papala" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a star-shaped image is displayed as a cut-in on the screen of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the board lamp 48F050 does not light in the big hit effect during the back operation in this example.

The validity period ends at t14 before the display of the result screen ends. After that, the common effect ends at t15, and the final result (in this example, 3 big hits and 3500 acquisitions) is displayed on the result screen. Then, the jackpot is notified by the accessory effect (the effect with movement by a movable object (not shown)), and the variable display in the final fluctuation is stopped (the jackpot symbol is stopped) at t16. If the back motion is not detected within the valid period, the promotion notification is performed during the period from t15 to t16, and the promotion notification prompts the specific operation to perform the revival jackpot effect. To. After that, the state shifts to the second special figure big hit game state.

In this way, when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation in the final fluctuation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state after the jackpot, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without the promotion notification being performed. , The big hit is notified by executing the big hit effect at the time of the back operation instead of executing the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation.

In addition, the jackpot effect during the back operation suggests a jackpot in a manner different from the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot middle suggestion effect. The jackpot effect during back operation is not limited to the one using the speakers 8L and 8R and the image display device 5, and may be an accessory effect by a movable device (not shown).

(Example of implementation of suggestion production during big hit)
FIG. 10-11 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F is operated behind the scenes during the second special figure big hit gaming state. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 10-11, a line indicating whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled (ON: during the jackpot gaming state, OFF: during the non-big hit gaming state) and a line indicating the presence or absence of the valid period (ON: valid period). Among them, OFF: outside the valid period) and a line indicating whether or not the back operation is detected (ON: with detection, OFF: without detection) are included. The example shown in FIG. 10-11 shows an example of the second special figure big hit gaming state controlled from the high accuracy high base state.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state at t21, the selection of the music in the jackpot gaming state is accepted at the 1st and 2nd rounds. During this time, the player can select the music in the jackpot game state. The validity period starts in accordance with t22 when the 3rd round of the big hit game state starts. The reason why the 1st and 2nd Rs do not become valid is that the trigger button of the stick controller 31A is used when selecting a song, as in the back operation.

When the back motion is detected at t23 within the valid period, the jackpot suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. It should be noted that the promotion notification is not performed for the back operation. In the jackpot suggestion effect, the board lamp 48F050 is turned on and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the execution pattern shown in FIG. 10-8 (B).

The validity period ends at t24 before the end of the final round (16R in this example) of the jackpot game state. After that, the big hit game state ends at t25. After that, in this example, the state shifts to the high accuracy and high base state.

In this way, in the second special figure big hit game state via the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state, when the back motion is detected within the valid period without the promotion notification being performed, the big hit middle suggestion effect is produced. Is executed, and it is suggested whether or not the state that has passed through to reach the second special figure big hit game state was a probable change state.

Further, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect, the board lamp is used. Both the 48F050 and the speakers 8L, 8R suggest the condition.

(Main effect of feature 48F)
As shown in FIG. 10-2, a common effect common to the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-9, since the common effect ends after the display of the result screen starts in the final variation in the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state, the player can see the result screen in the final variation. It is possible to specify the end of the common effect by starting the display. Then, after the display of the result screen starts in the final fluctuation, the back operation becomes effective over the valid period. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-9, when the back motion by the player is detected without the promotion notification being performed during this valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed based on the back motion. This suggests whether or not the state in which the common effect is being executed is a probable change state.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it changes whether or not the suggestion of the probabilistic state is made depending on whether or not the player has acted behind the scenes according to his or her own preference without being prompted by the promotion notification. .. For example, a player who knows the back movement can know whether or not the previous state is a probable change state by performing the back movement within the valid period, so that a player who does not know the back movement can do so. Can also give diversity to the game. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement within the valid period if he / she does not want to know whether or not the state so far is a probable change state. You can play while expecting to be in a probable state until the symbol stops at.

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11, the game is played without promotion notification in the second special figure jackpot game state controlled in the low accuracy high base state and the high accuracy high base state in which the common effect is performed. When the back motion by a person is detected, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed based on the back motion, and it is suggested whether or not the state in which the common effect is executed is the probabilistic state.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it changes whether or not the suggestion of the probabilistic state is made depending on whether or not the player has acted behind the scenes according to his or her own preference without being prompted by the promotion notification. .. For example, a player who knows the back movement performs the back movement in the second special figure big hit game state, so that the second special figure big hit game state under control has passed from the probabilistic state or is being controlled. 2nd special figure Since it is possible to know whether the jackpot game state has passed from the non-probability change state, it is possible to give more variety to the game than a player who does not know the back movement. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement in the second special figure big hit game state if he / she does not want to know whether or not the state so far is a probable change state. In that case, the production is not excessively performed.

The back operation that is the trigger for performing the suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation and the back operation that is the trigger for performing the suggestion effect during the big hit are both long presses of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, and both are common.

As a result, the content of the back motion that is the trigger for executing the suggestion effect does not change regardless of the situation during the final fluctuation or during the second special figure big hit game state, so that the back motion becomes complicated. Can be prevented as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot middle suggestion effect differ in some aspects but in common with other aspects. Specifically, in the final fluctuation suggestion effect, the state is suggested by the lighting by the board lamp 48F050, while the state is not suggested by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas in the jackpot suggestion effect. , Board lamp 48F050 and speakers 8L, 8R both suggest the condition.

As a result, a part of the execution mode of the suggestion staging differs depending on whether the situation is during the final change or during the second special figure big hit game state, so that the state suggestion should be appropriately performed according to the situation. Can be done. In particular, at the time of the final change when the common effect ends, there is a high possibility that the state will shift to the normal state after that, so it is the same as the case where the state is advantageous for the player as in the second special figure big hit game state. If the suggestion effect is executed in the manner, there is a possibility that the player may be overly disappointed. However, as in the present embodiment, in the final fluctuation suggestion staging, the excessive disappointment as described above can be reduced as much as possible by reducing the types of staging means used as compared with the big hit medium suggestion staging. can.

As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-10, when the back motion by the player is detected without the promotion notification being performed during the valid period when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the back motion is based on the back motion. The jackpot is suggested in advance by executing the jackpot effect during the back operation.

As a result, a player who knows the back movement can know in advance whether or not the jackpot has been decided by performing the back movement within the valid period, so that the player who does not know the back movement can know in advance. It is possible to give diversity to the game. On the other hand, even a player who knows the back movement does not have to perform the back movement within the valid period unless he / she does not want to know in advance whether or not the jackpot has been decided. You can play while expecting a big hit until the game stops.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the mode in the jackpot suggestion effect differs depending on the type of the common effect selected by the player. Specifically, in the common production A in which the male character appears as the main character, the voice of the male character is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while in the common production B in which the female character appears as the main character, the voice of the female character is output. It is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regardless of which of the common effect A and the common effect B is selected, the lighting mode by the board lamp 48F050 is common.

As a result, since a part of the execution mode of the jackpot suggestion effect is different depending on the type of the common effect selected by the player, the game becomes diverse and the interest of the game is improved.

(Modification example of the gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F)
Although the feature portion 48F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 48F will be described below.

(About suggestion staging)
In the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect performed during the back operation, an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a probable change state is exemplified, but the suggestion effect is a setting suggestion suggesting a setting value set in the gaming machine. It may be a production. The execution pattern of the setting suggestion will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. FIG. 10-12 is a diagram showing a table for determining an execution pattern of setting suggestion in a pachinko gaming machine of a modified example according to the feature portion 48F.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation, only the lamp lighting color is different with a different probability depending on the current set value regardless of the type of the common effect. Specifically, regardless of whether the common effect A or the common effect B is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes blue is higher than that of the other colors, and the setting value 3 Or, when the set value 4 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes green is higher than that of other colors, and when the set value 5 or the set value 6 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes red is higher than that of the other colors. In both the common effect A and the common effect B, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation does not give a voice suggestion.

As described above, in the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final change, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the state is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), in the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot, the lamp lighting color is different with a different probability depending on the current set value regardless of the type of the common effect. Specifically, regardless of whether the common effect A or the common effect B is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes blue is higher than that of the other colors, and the setting value 3 Or, when the set value 4 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes green is higher than that of other colors, and when the set value 5 or the set value 6 is set, the probability that the lamp lighting color becomes red is higher than that of the other colors.

Further, the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is different with a different probability depending on the type of common effect and the current set value. Specifically, when the common effect A is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the “normal” voice is output is higher than the other voices, and the setting value 3 or the setting value is set. When it is 4, the probability that the voice of "hot" is output is higher than that of other voices, and when it is the setting value 5 or the setting value 6, the probability that the voice of "hot heat" is output is the other voices. Higher than. On the other hand, when the common effect B is selected, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the probability that the “normal” voice is output is higher than the other voices, and the setting value 3 or the setting value 4 is used. Sometimes, the probability that the voice of "hot wane" is output is higher than that of other voices, and when the setting value is 5 or the setting value of 6, the probability that the voice of "hot heat" is output is higher than that of other voices. Is also expensive.

As described above, in the setting suggestion effect during the big hit, the mode of the lamp lighting color when suggesting the set value is common between the case where the common effect A is selected and the case where the common effect B is selected. , The mode of voice when suggesting the set value is different. In the setting suggestion effect at the time of the final fluctuation and the setting suggestion effect during the big hit, the lighting color of one lamp may correspond to the current set value. For example, when the setting value 1 or the setting value 2 is set, the lamp lighting color becomes blue, when the setting value 3 or the setting value 4 is set, the lamp lighting color becomes green, and when the setting value 5 or the setting value 6 is set, the lamp lighting color becomes. The color may be red. Further, in the setting suggestion effect during the big hit, one voice may correspond to the current set value according to the type of the common effect.

Further, the period suggesting whether or not the state is probable by the back motion and the period suggesting the set value by the back motion may be separated. For example, in the second special figure jackpot game state, it suggests whether or not it is in a probabilistic state by being back-operated in the middle round, and suggesting a set value by being back-operated during the ending in the final round. May be.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the lighting color of one lamp corresponds to the state of the suggestion target, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one lamp lighting color may be determined from a plurality of types of lamp lighting colors at a ratio according to the state of the suggestion target. For example, in the final variation suggestion effect, in both the common effect A and the common effect B, the probability is determined to be blue with a higher probability than red in the low accuracy high base state, and the probability is higher than blue in the high accuracy high base state. May be determined to be red. Similarly, in the jackpot suggestion effect, in both the common effect A and the common effect B, the probability is determined to be blue with a higher probability than red in the low accuracy high base state, and the probability is higher than blue in the high accuracy high base state. May be determined to be red. Further, their selection probabilities may be the same for the final variation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the lamp lighting color mode is the same for the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot middle suggestion effect, but the lamp lighting color mode is different between the two. There may be.

The pachinko gaming machine is not limited to executing both the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect, and may execute only one of them.

In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect at the time of the final change or the suggestion effect during the big hit suggests whether or not the player is in the probable change state, but other states or benefits may be suggested. For example, the final fluctuation suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect may indicate whether or not the time is shortened.

In the present embodiment, an example of executing the jackpot suggestion effect during the jackpot gaming state when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs (during the 16R probability variation jackpot round) has been described, but the jackpot gaming state when the 8R probability variation jackpot occurs. The suggestion effect during the jackpot may be executed even during the medium (during the 8R probability variation jackpot round) or during the jackpot gaming state when the 3R probability variation jackpot occurs (during the 3R probability variation jackpot round).

The jackpot suggestion effect may or may not be executed depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. For example, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed during the 16R probability variation jackpot round or the 8R probability variation jackpot round, whereas the jackpot suggestion effect may not be executed during the 3R probability variation jackpot round. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the game becoming monotonous due to the large number of big hit rounds as much as possible. Alternatively, while the jackpot suggestion effect is executed during the 3R probability variation jackpot round, the jackpot suggestion effect may not be executed during the 16R probability variation jackpot round or the 8R probability variation jackpot round. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the disappointment caused by the fact that the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot did not occur due to the variety of games by the suggestion effect during the jackpot.

The jackpot suggestion effect may be executed with different probabilities depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. For example, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed with a high probability in the order of the 16R probability variation jackpot round, the 8R probability variation jackpot round, and the 3R probability variation jackpot round. Alternatively, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed with a high probability in the order of the 3R probability variation jackpot round, the 8R probability variation jackpot round, and the 16R probability variation jackpot round. In this way, the game can be varied.

The jackpot suggestion effect suggests a state before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (that is, a state in which the second special figure jackpot has occurred), but the suggestion target of the jackpot suggestion effect is not limited to this. .. For example, the jackpot suggestion effect may be suggested by adding the state after the round of the second special figure jackpot is completed. Specifically, when a normal jackpot occurs in a low probability state, an image or sound suggesting "previous normal + next normal" may be output, and when a probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability state. May output an image or sound that suggests "previous normal + next normal", and if a normal jackpot occurs in a high probability state, an image or sound that suggests "previous normal + next normal" may be output. May be output, and when a probability change jackpot occurs in a high probability state, an image or sound suggesting "previous probability change + next probability change" may be output. In this way, the suggestion content of the jackpot suggestion effect may be different depending on the combination of the previous state and the next state.

The suggestion target during the jackpot may be different depending on which period during the jackpot gaming state is controlled. For example, in the period from the fanfare effect that notifies that the second special figure jackpot has occurred to the second round, the previous state is suggested by the jackpot suggestion effect, and in the period from the third round to the ending effect, the jackpot is in progress. The next state may be suggested by the suggestion effect. In this way, the round period during the jackpot game state may be divided into the first half and the second half, and the suggestion target of the jackpot suggestion effect may be different between the two. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the game becoming monotonous due to the large number of big hit rounds as much as possible. Although the mode of the back movement may be different between the first half and the second half of the round period during the big hit game state, it is kinder to the player to have the same mode of the back movement between the first half and the second half.

(About back operation)
In the present embodiment, the back operation is illustrated by long pressing the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, but the back operation may be another operation. For example, the back operation may be a continuous press of the trigger button of the stick controller 31A, a long press or continuous press of the push button 31B, or a single operation thereof. Further, the back operation may be one in which the trigger button, the push button 31B, or the like of the stick controller 31A is operated by a predetermined operation procedure (command procedure). Further, when a sensor for non-contactly detecting the movement of the player's hand or the like is provided, the back movement may be the movement of the player's hand or the like detected by the sensor. Further, not limited to the movement of the player's body, the voice emitted by the player may be detected by the microphone as a back motion, or the line of sight of the player may be detected by eye tracking as a back motion.

(About common production)
In the present embodiment, as the common effect, the common effect A in which the male character appears as the main character and the common effect B in which the female character appears as the main character are exemplified, but the common effect may be another effect. .. For example, the common effect is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In addition, all effects are not limited to those that are common to the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and among the common effects that can be selected by the player, the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state are included. It suffices if the common production is included. Further, the common effect is not selected by the player, but may be automatically selected by lottery or the like.

In addition, the multiple types of common effects are not limited to those in which the background and the characters appearing are different from each other, but also the mode of big hit notice and reach notice, and the mode of promotion notification that urges the player to operate the trigger button and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. , And other effects such as a mission effect that imposes a predetermined mission on the player and gives a privilege to the player when the mission is achieved, may be different from each other.

(Validity period at the time of final fluctuation)
In the present embodiment, the start timing of the valid period at the time of the final fluctuation matches the timing at which the display of the result screen starts, but the start timing of the valid period is not limited to this. The validity period may start at any timing of the period from the start of the final fluctuation to the final stop of the symbol. For example, the validity period may start at the timing when the final fluctuation starts. Further, the valid period may be started at a timing in the middle of the final fluctuation. As an example in which the validity period starts at the timing in the middle of the final fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the timing at which the display of the result screen starts and the count-up of the result of the game such as the number of big hits and the number of acquisitions on the result screen are counted up. The timing to start is assumed. Further, if the count is displayed while subtracting the number of STs, the valid period is at the timing when the player can specify the state where there is no remaining number of STs (for example, the timing when the display of the number of STs becomes "0"). May start. The result screen does not necessarily have to be displayed at the time of the final fluctuation, but in any case, it is preferable to start the valid period at a timing that can be specified by the player.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the valid period at the time of the final change is the timing before the display of the result screen ends, but the valid period ends at the timing when the symbol finally stops in the final change. You may. The valid period may be a period during which the player can specify the end of the common effect.

(Regarding the validity period in the second special figure jackpot game state)
In the present embodiment, the start timing of the valid period in the second special figure big hit game state matches the start timing of the 3rd round, but the start timing of the valid period is not limited to this. The validity period may start at any timing of the period from the start of the first round of the second special figure jackpot game state to the end of the final round. For example, the valid period may start at the timing when the second special figure big hit game state starts. Further, the valid period may be started at a timing in the middle of the second special figure big hit game state. As an example in which the valid period starts at the timing in the middle of the second special figure big hit game state, the timing at which the 3rd round starts is assumed as shown in FIG. 10-11. Further, as long as the fanfare effect for notifying that the second special figure jackpot has occurred is executed, the valid period may start at the timing when the fanfare effect starts.

In the present embodiment, the end timing of the valid period in the second special figure jackpot game state is the timing before the end of the final round, but the valid period may end at the timing when the final round ends. ..

Further, a valid period may be set in the final round in the second special figure jackpot game state, or a valid period may be set in the execution period of the ending effect performed in the final round. In recent gaming machines, there is a tendency for the ending effect and other effects to be lengthened so as to minimize the ball output rate of the entire game. It is possible to alleviate the delay as much as possible by the suggestive staging by the back motion. When an ending effect with a short effect period and an ending effect with a longer effect period than the ending effect are provided, an effective period is not provided during the execution period of the ending effect with a shorter effect period, whereas the effect period is provided. A valid period may be provided during the execution period of the long ending effect.

The validity period in the second special figure jackpot game state may be provided only during the round of the jackpot game, may be provided only between the adjacent rounds before and after (so-called inter-round interval), and the round and It may be provided at all intervals between rounds.

(About the big hit production at the time of back operation)
In the present embodiment, when the final variation is a big hit variation and the back operation is performed during the valid period, the back operation big hit effect is executed instead of the final variation suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the back operation is performed during the valid period, the final fluctuation suggestion effect is executed and the back operation jackpot effect is executed. Alternatively, the back operation jackpot effect may be executed after the final variation suggestion effect is executed, or the final variation suggestion effect may be executed after the back motion jackpot effect is executed.

(About promotion notification)
In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed by operating behind the scenes without performing the promotion notification, but the promotion notification may be performed at the time of executing the suggestion effect. .. For example, by displaying a predetermined procedure (for example, button pressing × 10 times) at a position that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, an area covered by a decoration or a movable object on the screen of the image display device 5). The procedure of the back operation may be notified to the player.

(Applicable to slot machines)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the feature portion 48F is applied to the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the feature portion 48F may be applied to the slot machine. Generally, a slot machine is provided with a plurality of variable display units (reels, display windows) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs), each of which can be identified, and after variable display of the variable display unit, variable display is performed. By stopping the variable display of the unit, the display result (stop display of the symbol) is derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination (stop display of the symbol combination) which is a combination of the display results of multiple variable display units. Is.

In the slot machine as described above, the operation mode (operation procedure, operation timing) of the derivation operation means (stop switch) for deriving the display result combination in which the winning prize is advantageous for the player is controlled to the advantageous section that can be notified. It is possible to do. In the advantageous section, the AT (assist time), which is not controlled in the non-advantageous section (normal section), is controlled to give an advantageous prize (for example, a small winning combination that gives more payouts than the number of bets). Therefore, there is a high possibility that the payout rate in the advantageous section will exceed 1.

Such a state in AT may be suggested by a suggestion effect related to the feature portion 48F. Specifically, the AT ends by digesting the given number of sets, but when one set is digested, the AT continues by shifting to the next set at a predetermined continuation rate. That is, the higher the AT continuation rate, the longer the AT, which is in an advantageous state, will continue. Then, if a plurality of types of ATs having different continuation rates are provided and a common effect common to each other is executed in the plurality of types of ATs, the player will play while predicting the continuation rate of the ATs. ..

For example, when the feature unit 48F is applied to the slot machine described above, when the result display indicating the number of payouts of the AT is displayed in the final set of the AT, the operation means (effect button, etc.) without performing the promotion notification is performed. ) Is operated to indicate the continuation rate of the AT to be terminated by the lamp lighting color or the like.

Even when the feature portion 48F is applied to the slot machine in this way, the same effect as that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature portion 48F in the above-described embodiment is obtained.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine for playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 48F), and has a plurality of types of states (for example, non-game machines) having different advantages for the player. A state control means for controlling either a probabilistic state or a probable change state (for example, special symbol process processing in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) and a player's operation (for example, back operation, specific operation). The motion detecting means (for example, the stick controller 31A) to be detected and the promotion notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) for prompting the player to perform the motion detected by the motion detecting means (for example, the specific motion) are promoted. Regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled, the common effect common to the plurality of types of states (for example, low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base). A common effect executing means (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and a suggestion means for suggesting one of the plurality of types of states (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 includes a process of executing the final fluctuation suggestion effect in 48FS024 of FIG. 10-4), and the suggestion means has a specific period (for example, a specific period in which the player can specify the end of the common effect in the predetermined period). , The motion of the player (for example, the back motion) is detected by the motion detecting means without the promotion notification being performed during the period during which the result screen is displayed (the valid period of t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9). Based on this, the state in the predetermined period is suggested (see, for example, FIGS. 10-4 and 10-9), and the specific conditions are satisfied (for example, V in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). A profit-giving means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the winning area) is probable after the jackpot game is completed. The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation big hit), and the specific condition is satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the condition is not satisfied, the specific information storage means (for example, for the second effect control) that can store the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. Step 012IWS9 in CPU012IW120b A gaming machine provided with a portion for executing 58 to S960) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F) that is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of types of advantageous state control means to be controlled (for example, special symbol process processing in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) and a state different from the advantageous state but having different advantages for the player. A state control means for controlling one of the states (for example, non-probable change state, probable change state) (for example, special symbol process processing in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) and the player's operation (for example, back operation). , A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a specific motion) and a facilitating notification means (for example, an effect) for prompting a player to perform a motion detected by the motion detecting means (for example, a specific motion). A common effect common to the plurality of types of states (for example, low accuracy and high base state) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, low accuracy and high base state) regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled. Alternatively, a common effect executing means (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and a suggestion means suggesting one of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing the common effect by the effect control CPU 120) over a high accuracy and high base state control period). For example, the effect control CPU 120 includes the process of executing the big hit middle suggestion effect at 48FS083 in FIG. 10-7, and the suggestion means is the advantageous state controlled in the predetermined period (for example, the second special figure big hit). In the gaming state), the state in the predetermined period is suggested based on the fact that the movement of the player (for example, the back movement) is detected by the movement detecting means without performing the promotion notification (for example, FIG. 10). -7, see FIG. 10-11), and further, the player is benefited from the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). A means for giving profits that can be granted (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) controls the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game) is provided, and at least the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It can be established based on (for example, a probability variation jackpot), and when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is specified that the specific condition is not satisfied. Possible specific information (for example, probability change failure) A gaming machine provided with specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU012IW120b) that can store date and time log information) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine related to the feature unit 48F), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of types of advantageous state control means to be controlled (for example, special symbol process processing in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) and a state different from the advantageous state but having different advantages for the player. A state control means for controlling one of the states (for example, non-probable change state, probable change state) (for example, special symbol process processing in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103, see FIG. 10-2) and the player's operation (for example, back operation). , A motion detecting means (for example, stick controller 31A) for detecting a specific motion) and a facilitating notification means (for example, an effect) for prompting a player to perform a motion detected by the motion detecting means (for example, a specific motion). A common effect common to the plurality of types of states (for example, low accuracy and high base state) is performed for a predetermined period (for example, low accuracy and high base state) regardless of which of the plurality of types of states is controlled. Alternatively, a common effect executing means (for example, a process of executing a common effect by the effect control CPU 120) and a suggestion means suggesting one of the plurality of types of states (for example, a process of executing the common effect by the effect control CPU 120) over a high accuracy and high base state control period). For example, the effect control CPU 120 includes a process of executing a final fluctuation suggestion effect at 48F024 in FIG. 10-4 and a process of executing a big hit middle suggestion effect in 48FS083 of FIG. 10-7), and the suggestion means is described above. During a specific period within a predetermined period in which the player can specify the end of the common effect (for example, the period during which the result screen is displayed and the valid period from t2 to t4 in FIG. 10-9), the promotion notification is sent. Based on the fact that the movement of the player (for example, the back movement) is detected by the movement detecting means without being performed, the first suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (for example, FIGS. 10-4, FIG. 10-9), in the advantageous state controlled in the predetermined period (for example, the second special figure big hit gaming state), the movement of the player (for example, the back) by the movement detecting means without the promotion notification being performed. Based on the detection of the operation), the second suggestion suggesting the state in the predetermined period is made (see, for example, FIGS. 10-7 and 10-11), and the specific condition is further satisfied (for example, the first). 2 The game ball has won a prize in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b) Based on this, the above-mentioned specification is provided with a profit-giving means capable of giving a profit to the player (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) controls the player to a probable change state after the jackpot game ends). The condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved), and when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned A portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b that can store specific information (for example, log information of the date and time when the probability change is not established) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. ) Is provided.

According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the state suggestion changes depending on whether or not the player operates according to his / her own preference without being prompted to move, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

In addition, the period in which the promotion notification is not performed in a predetermined period or a specific period is classified into a plurality of types, and the type of the period when the movement of the player is detected by the motion detection means in the period in which the promotion notification is not performed. Depending on the situation, the content suggested by the suggestion means (for example, the ease of understanding which state it is in) may be different. By doing so, the content of the suggestion and the comprehensibility of the state change depending on the timing at which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game and can suitably store information, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and specific conditions are satisfied (). For example, a profit-giving means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically)) capable of giving a profit to a player based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b. The CPU 103) is provided with (controlling the probability change state after the end of the big hit game), and the specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability change big hit). Specific information storage means that can store specific information that can identify that the specific condition was not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the condition is satisfied. (For example, a gaming machine provided with (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b)). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of other morphological examples will be described. Next, the feature unit 012IW will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 012IW. In this feature unit 012IW, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a passing gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 11-2).

Further, in this feature unit 012IW, as shown in FIG. 11-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, the first special winning opening constituting the first large winning opening is formed on the right side of the game area. A variable winning device 012IW007a and a second special variable winning device 012IW007a constituting the second large winning opening are provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 11-2). Further, the game ball that has won a prize in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 11-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and the game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is a V winning switch 012IW024 (FIG. 11-). 2) is detected.

In this example, the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 is detected by the winning opening switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 11-2).

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) inputs the detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041), the game ball passes through the passing gate 012IW041. Controls to transmit a gate passage designation command for specifying that the passage has passed to the second staging control board 012IW12b. Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 inputs the detection signal from the winning opening switch 012IW010a (when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10), the winning opening for designating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. Control is performed to transmit the winning designation command to the second staging control board 012IW12b.

Further, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives, for example, a command indicating that the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is full from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board. , Controls to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has been detected to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer may, for example, confirm whether or not a detection signal from a full tank switch for detecting a full tank state provided in the hit ball supply dish (lower dish) has been input to hit the ball. It is possible to detect the full state of the supply plate (lower plate).

In this example, since the passing gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, the player shoots at the right side of the game area. It is advantageous to perform the operation (so-called right-handed operation). Further, in this example, since the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, the player performs a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Is advantageous.

On the other hand, in this example, when the gaming state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, controlled to the low base state) and the jackpot game is not in progress, the player aims at the left side of the game area. It is considered that it is easier for the game ball to win the first start winning opening and it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (so-called left-handed operation).

In this feature unit 012IW, for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is used. It is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and in the fourth round, the second special variable winning is won. The device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. Then, on condition that the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the game state is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game ends. In this example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, winning in the V winning area is a condition, but the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example). Therefore, it will be generally controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed.

In the feature unit 012IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is subjected to the jackpot opening process (step S115) and the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) of the special symbol process process (step S25). When it is detected that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, when an on signal from the V winning switch 012IW024 is input), the game ball is placed in the V winning area. Control is performed to transmit a V prize designation command for designating that a prize has been won (a V prize has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b.

Further, in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a Is controlled to the open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and the second special variable is performed in the fourth round. The winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in an open state until a very short period (0.1 seconds in this example) elapses. In this example, in the case of a normal jackpot, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be in the open state in the fourth round as in the case of the probability variation jackpot, but for an extremely short period (0.1 in this example). Since it is only released for a second), it is rarely controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is over.

Further, in this feature unit 012IW, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b are mounted in place of the staging control board 12 shown in FIG.

The first staging control board 012IW12a is equipped with a first staging control CPU012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, a display control unit 012IW123, and an I / O 012IW125a. The first effect control CPU 012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b and executing the effect based on the received command. Further, in this example, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B is input to the first staging control CPU 012IW120a mounted on the first staging control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b is equipped with a second effect control CPU 012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, RAM012IW122b, a random number circuit 012IW124, I / O012IW125b, and a real-time clock 012IW126. The second effect control CPU012IW120b has a function of executing the effect control main process, receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and is based on the received effect control command. It has a function to execute the effect control process process (however, it controls the effect means such as the actual image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, and the input means such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The control of the part that accepts the input from is performed on the first staging control CPU012IW120a side). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is set to have a timer interrupt time of 10 ms at the start of power supply, and a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms to execute various processes.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM 012IW 122b by using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the RAM012IW122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is recorded in the log area at least for a predetermined period. The log information is retained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 012IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 012IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 012IW003a, and when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game hall clerk into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and glass. The door frame 012IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 012IW051, is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 012IW051 does not open the board case 012IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case 012IW201 so as to be operable.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key of. Further, since the setting key 012IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 012IW051. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 012IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 012IW201 is provided with a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 012IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the feature unit 012IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 012IW051 will be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 012IW, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a is the right end portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. A security cover 012IW500A that covers the back side is attached. The curity cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. Further, the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the long piece 012IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 012IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable due to the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-4, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and separates from the long piece 012IW500Ab. When the covering state by 012IW500Ab is released, it becomes an operable state.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 012IW is maintained in a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted by the security cover 012IW500A when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Unless the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 012IW003 is opened by the door key or the like, the setting key 012IW051 cannot be operated to change the set value.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 012IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the pachinko / pachislot machine, the security cover 012IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 is covered by the security cover 012IW500A, the board case 012IW201 is housed in the board case 012IW201 through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 012IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for making various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -5 (C) and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (not shown) and the small hit variation pattern determination table (not shown). (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-7, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 012IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2, 3 is, the higher the advantage is stepwise. In this feature unit 012IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
11-5 (A) to 11-5 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to 11-5 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to 11-5 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-5, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 012IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to 11-5 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using a separate table for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present feature unit 012IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-5, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 012IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature unit 012IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-8, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 012IW will be described with reference to FIG. 11-6 (B). In the feature unit 012IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. After that, it is a period during which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big winning opening is opened on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. This is the period during which the interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the next round is executed after the end of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the end of the jackpot gaming state is notified on the first staging control board 012IW12a and the second staging control board 012IW12b. This is the period during which the ending effect as the effect action to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 012IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 012IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 012IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly performed.

Further, in this feature unit 012IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 012IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 012IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. In this feature unit 012IW, the ratio of big hits is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 012IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability change control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 012IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 012IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 012IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the present feature unit 012IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 012IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 as the property (so-called V probability variation type), the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probabilistic state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C), the feature unit 012IW is provided with small hit types A to C as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), in the feature unit 012IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “3”.

Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the opening period and the number of opening times of the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". The small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 012IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 11-7 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 012IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A) has a higher rate of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss at times other than non-reach loss, depending on the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 012IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 012IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 012IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 012IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 012IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 012IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 012IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern shaking display and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 012IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final) The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature unit 012IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 012IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 012IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 012IW will be described. 11-9 to 11-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 012IW. In the feature unit 012IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer for waiting for the activation of the effect control means for measurement is set (step 012IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation wait timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004 and the processes of steps 012IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 012IWS006 are executed after waiting until the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started, and the setting values are changed, confirmed, and RAM. Initialization and recovery processing are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the first effect control CPU012IW120a and the second effect control CPU012IW120b are started. It is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch was pressed when the power was turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power cutoff process (see step 012IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 012IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which a RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power cutoff process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, in step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 012IWS008). In step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3". (Step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 012IWS008), or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 012IWS009). Is set by the CPU 103 with a RAM error flag indicating that an error has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values "1" to "3" (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

In step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear process includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 012IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 012IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016), and proceeds to step 012IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is off (N in step 012IWS012), when the setting key 012IW051 is off (N in step 012IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 012IWS013). In step 012IWS014 N), the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the second staging control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012IWS018). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 012IW029 to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating that a RAM error has occurred. Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processes after step 012IWS018 are repeatedly executed.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS007 to S020, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 012IW (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), and a power failure occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 012IWS011), the RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting key 012IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, and the set value after step 012IWS025. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 012IWS022 and step 012IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected to be turned on when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. After that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, instead of checking the status of the clear switch directly, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. (See steps 012IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS026). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (). Step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM error flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM error flag is set (that is, if an error in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 fills the set value confirmation buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current set value). Set to the set value "1" (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM error flag.

When the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b receive a setting confirmation command or a setting change command, they control to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example). , A predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when the operation buttons for the effect such as the push button 31B are pressed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, "maintenance mode" or the like is displayed and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode. It may be configured to do so. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). It is a mode in which you can check the recording of the set value of. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 012IWS030). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 012IWS031 and executes the power cutoff process (step 012IWS031). In the power cutoff process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power cutoff signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power off processing, when the CPU 103 detects that the power off signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data (for example, a backup flag, a checksum) in the backup RAM area. do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012IWS043 as it is.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial set flag indicating that the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting an input state (whether it is an on state or an off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the gaming machine is turned on), the process proceeds to step 012IWS039 as it is.

If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value has never been set in the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 103 puts the clear switch buffer on. The indicated value (for example, "1") is set (step 012IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial set flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the previous clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set if the clear switch is in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, in the CPU 103, the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state (for example, "0"), and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 012IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the already stored set value) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "2", and the set value "2" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated and displayed to "1", and the set value "1" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) by executing the above steps 012IWS025 to S043 (steps 012IWS025, S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (Y in steps 012IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027). At the same time, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of step 012IWS033 is executed to start the external output of the security signal. , Step 012 The security information timer is set in IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the process of step 012IWS020, the security signal is output externally even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is reset.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 012IWS049. The processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 012IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). The processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 012IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 012IW, as shown in FIG. 11-12, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 012IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and if the clear switch is off, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed. Only the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 (A) and 11-13 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 012IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk of the amusement park or the like in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the clear switch is operated). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall or the like, thereby turning off the display monitor 012IW029. Notify the clerk or the like that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 11-13 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear process is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 012IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting change process is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 012IW), or the most advantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the feature unit 012IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-13, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 012IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 012IW029, for example. Further, for example, the display monitor 012IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", or if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 012IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 012IW will be described. 11-14 and 11-15 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 012IWS171). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 012IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS172 to S174, in the feature unit 012IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012IWS175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 012IWS177). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second staging control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the processing of step 012IWS047. However, even after the power is turned on, the step By executing the process of 012IWS178, a set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 012IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command for directly specifying a set value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the set values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 012IWS178, the set value is set. A identifiable variation pattern command may be transmitted, and the variation pattern commands may be configured to be prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the setting value "1", commands 1C00 (H) to are prepared as variation pattern commands. , The setting value "2" may be configured to prepare commands 2C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands, and the setting value "3" may be configured to prepare commands 3C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Minute fluctuation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 012IWS047) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 012IWS178) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the staging control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) can be output on the game control microcomputer 100 side regardless of the set value, and either the first effect control CPU012IW120a or the second effect control CPU012IW120b can be output. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof are different depending on the set value of. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current gaming state (step 012IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 11-5) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if the value is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 012IWS186 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the big hit determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11-6) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 012IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an outlier symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Main processing of staging control)
Next, the operation of the staging control means in the feature unit 012IW will be described. FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 012IW. In the feature unit 012IW, the processing of steps 012IWS201 to S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S72 shown in FIG. When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the power-on date and time (step). 012IWS203).

Next, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

The feature unit 012IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the changed effect mode may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. .. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The method of changing the staging mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as staging mode A → staging mode B → staging mode C → staging mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes error notification processing for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation, and executes the maintenance mode process for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the set value is changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the current time setting process for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes a power failure date / time recording process for recording the power failure date / time when the power failure occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, the process returns to step 012IWS204.

(Command analysis processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the receive command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b. (Step 012IWS305). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS306). In the feature unit 012IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And.

In addition, in this feature unit 012IW, the set value command is sent when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normal due to missing commands or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 012IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 012IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 012IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read out on the second effect control CPU012IW120b side, the set value is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not the setting value included in the command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, it may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal. Further, for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is made to store the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value is received. If the setting value indicated by the command and the setting value stored last time do not match, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in the feature unit 012IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
In the feature unit 012IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the second staging control board 012IW12b side, the image display device 5 receives a predetermined initial stage. Control is performed to display a roll (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols that is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial roll effect). ).

If the received effect control command is an initialization specification command or a recovery command (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). .. If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Based on the stored setting values, the even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which are a combination of even decorative symbols, and the odd decorative symbols are used using the initial roll determination table. Determine one of a combination of odd initial rolls (eg, "135", "113", etc.) and a special initial roll, which is a combination of decorative symbols including special symbols (eg, star symbols) (step). 012IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 012IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area by using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 11-19 (A). Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIGS. 11-19 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (the initial roll is determined). Step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 012IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A), for the set value "1", the ratio of the odd initial roll is determined to be the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where the odd initial roll or the special initial roll is displayed and the player is disappointed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS314.

FIG. 11-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS312 to S313, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 012IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. Despite this, the odd-numbered initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 012IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 012IWS314).

Although the feature unit 012IW describes that the image display device 5 controls the display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly control the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L, 8R. More specifically, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Is transmitted a command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a controls the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, and 8R based on the command from the second effect control CPU012IW120b to perform various effects and notifications. This also applies to other similar description points in the feature unit 012IW.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines the initial output to be an even initial output and displays an image. In the device 5, control is performed to display an even initial result (step 012IWS315).

By executing the process of step 012IWS315, the feature unit 012IW uniformly displays an even initial result in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd-numbered initial roll symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 11-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial result is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the setting value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result in the effect mode B. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 012IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the set value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b displays a character display such as "a setting value abnormality error has occurred" on the image display device 5, or a voice or an error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In that case, it is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b uses the received variation pattern command in the RAM 012IW122b. Store in the command storage area (step 012IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received staging control command is a display result specification command (a staging control command that specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, a big hit type, and a small hit type) (step 012IWS323), the second staging The control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation specification command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the confirmation command reception flag. (Step 012IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS327), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328). ).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330). ).

If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS301.

The feature unit 012IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial roll or an even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so as to be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is 3. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial roll, one of these initial rolls may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 012IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the jackpot suggestion effect executed during the jackpot (for example, during the jackpot game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> big hit suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> big hit medium suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be configurable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be able to change.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the customer waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to “1” (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b matches the predetermined condition with the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 012IWS506). Check whether or not (step 012IWS507). In step 012IWS507, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and a predetermined period elapses (and the game is not controlled to the big hit game state), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means matches a predetermined condition, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, in step 012IWS508, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 is specifically determined by the number of fluctuation counters for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine described later. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the value of (see step 012IWS603) is 0.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

In the feature unit 012IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect that is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. The decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed.

FIG. 11-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 012IWS510, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (A) is used to perform a lottery process based on random numbers according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 11-21 (A), determination values are assigned so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous setting value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting was changed when the power was turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the pre-game suggestion effect using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 012IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS515.

FIG. 11-21 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS513 to S514, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 012IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 012IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS517.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS516 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS513, the feature unit 012IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is disappointed is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 012IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, it may be possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it may be possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 11-21 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute a customer waiting demo effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 012IWS516).

Step 012 When the process of IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer waiting demo effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 012IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) It may be possible to store information indicating (a mode of effect at the time of execution) and perform an effect of estimating a set value from these information and notifying the user. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or the estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 012IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. Further, the process of step 012IWS516 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make people interested in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, and to give motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 012IW, for example, the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). You may. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 012IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and at the end of the game, the image display device 5 displays the execution history information as described later. It may be configured to display a code or the like. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the game end operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it is detected that the game end option is selected and the determination operation is performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. .. If it is detected that the game end operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts the log information from the log area of the RAM012IW122b, and the extracted log information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time described later). Generate a two-dimensional code including (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

Although the feature unit 012IW describes that the operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. More specifically, first, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input on the first effect control CPU012IW120a side, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b goes through the first effect control CPU012IW120a. Enter a command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated. This also applies to other similar description points in the feature unit 012IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b displays the decorative symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). (Stop symbol) is determined (step 012IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 012IWS602 by the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the display result (decorative pattern) of the variable display of the identification information according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. The display result determination means for determining the stop symbol) is realized. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. May be good.

In step 012IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the second staging control CPU012IW120b determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. .. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the second staging control CPU012IW120b is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even symbols as stop symbols. To decide.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the second effect control CPU012IW120b uses a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. decide. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the second staging control CPU012IW120b has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 012IWS602. In this way, the combination of the jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and stops the decorative symbol using a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Determine the design. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 012IWS603). In the feature unit 012IW, the value of the fluctuation count counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the fluctuation count counter is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It is assumed that the value starts from the state of 0.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b selects the process table according to the in-game suggestion effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the in-game suggestion effect are determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The second effect control CPU012IW120b refers to the process table and controls to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 012IW121b of the second staging control board 012IW12b. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, when the execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 012IWS604, the process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 012IWS605, and step 012IWS607 is selected according to the selected process table. And by executing the variable display during effect process (step S172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is a staging device (image display device 5 as a staging component, staging component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as staging parts) is executed (step 012IWS607).

In this feature unit 012IW, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the second effect control CPU012IW120b , The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern command.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 012IWS609), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 012IWS604) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the second effect control CPU012IW120b is in the special period (Y in step 012IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS702), and during the special period. If not (N in step 012IWS701), the second gaming suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 012IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress in step 012IWS701.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 012IWS705).

FIG. 11-24 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 11-24 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-24 (B), the highly reliable in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-24 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". (Step 012IWS707).

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 012IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-24 (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest, and it may not be determined as the third effect mode. By making such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 11-24 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 11-24 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 012IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is restricted not to be executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 012IWS708, the feature unit 012IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-24 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-24 (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is 2 or 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 012IW, the in-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the in-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 012IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game of a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. , Different aspects of the suggestion effect during the game may be feasible. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 012IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect during the game is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Alternatively, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. It may be set to be high, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the rate when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of performing the suggestion effect during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Production decision processing during big hit)
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit medium effect determination process. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Then, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 012IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

In step S012IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) is shown. One big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-26 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the customer waiting demo production is finished. Further, in this feature unit 012IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 012IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and 11-26 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 012IW, when the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 012IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed by the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (A1), after the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, the figure is shown. As shown in 11-39 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the second The effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the setting value is "1". (Step 012IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 012IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and 11-26 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the staging mode A, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the current staging mode is the staging mode C (step 012IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 012IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS907.

FIG. 11-26 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and it may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 012IWS905 to S906, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 012IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation where the big hit suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 012IWS905, the feature unit 012IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the big hit middle suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and 11-26 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) and 11-26 (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-26 (B), the ratio of the jackpot suggestion effect not being executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio of not being executed is different depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 012IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect is executed reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or the advance notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 012IW, the big hit middle suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the big hit middle suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (B2), the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 11-38 (A1) and 11-38 (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 012IW, since the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 012IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the character effect effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D), when the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed, the character effect effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by reducing the execution rate of the character effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D), and the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not the light guide plate effect is present (step 012IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 012IWS908).

Here, a light guide plate 012IW103 having a light transmissive property capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so as to allow light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 012IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 012IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (B3), light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Character appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIGS. 11-26 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 012IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the game's interest due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Ending production processing)
11-27 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot middle effect process (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and the effect device (image display) according to the contents of the process data n. A process for controlling the device 5, the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the big hit or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (N in step 012IW958), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

If the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is terminated (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the V prize designation command has been received (step 012IWS959). If the V prize designation command has been received (Y in step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961 as it is.

If the V prize designation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS959), the second staging control CPU012IW120b inputs date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and logs the input date and time information in the log area of RAM012IW122b as a probability change failure date and time. Store the information (step 012IWS960). That is, in this case, the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is controlled by the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (29.5 seconds in this example). Since the game ball does not win in the V winning area in the special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the probability change state, the log information is recorded as the probability change failure date and time. Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In this example, the case where the probability change failure is detected and the log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the big hit game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is released in the fourth round during the jackpot game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round). Or, even if it is configured to detect whether or not the probability change is not established and record the log information during the 5th round after the 4th round (during the opening of the 2nd special variable winning device 012IW007b of the 5th round). good.

(Error notification processing)
11-28 to 11-31 are flowcharts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the first left-handed notification in progress flag indicating that the first left-handed notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first left-handed notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second left-handed notification flag indicating that the second left-handed notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS102).

If the second left-handed notification in progress flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103). Whether or not the big hit game is in progress means that, for example, the value of the effect process flag updated in the effect control process process is a value indicating the big hit middle effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is present. If the jackpot game is not in progress, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is in the high base state (step 012IWS104). To determine whether or not the system is in the high base state, for example, check whether or not a command that can identify the state in the high base state (for example, a probabilistic state background specification command or a time saving state background specification command) has been received. It can be determined by doing.

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the gate passage designation command has been received (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b counts the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 012IW041. The value of the gate passage counter for the purpose is added by 1 (step 012IWS106), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 5 (step 012IWS107).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second staging control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim at the left!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS109). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step). 012IWS110). That is, in this case, since the player is in the low base state and is not in the big hit game, the left-handed operation is originally performed. Since the fact that the detection is performed 5 times means that the right-handed operation is being performed, the first left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second staging control CPU012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the left-handed notification display (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim at the left!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized left-handed notification display as compared with the case where the first left-handed notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second left-handed notification in-progress flag (step 012IWS115). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step). 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the base is low and the game is not a big hit, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total. Therefore, the second left-handed notification is performed to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation. If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first left-handed notification flag and the first left-handed notification timer are reset.

In this example, the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 10 times in total, whereas the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is satisfied. Since the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage is detected five times in total, the second left-handed notification is based on the fact that the execution conditions of the two first left-handed notifications are satisfied. The execution condition is satisfied.

Further, in this example, it is assumed that the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 012IW041 is detected 5 times or 10 times in total. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening is detected even once, the execution condition of the left-handed notification is satisfied. It may be configured to execute left-handed notification.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the left-handed notification date and time (step 012IWS117). As described above, in this example, there are two types of left-handed notification, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification, but the log is only performed when the second left-handed notification, which is more important, is executed. Log information is not recorded when recording in the information and executing the first left-handed notification of low importance.

If the gate passage designation command has not been received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 012IW041 has been detected, has the second effect control CPU 012IW120b received the winning opening winning designation command? It is confirmed whether or not (step 012IWS118). If the winning opening winning designation command is received (that is, if the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected), the second staging control CPU012IW120b The value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the fact that the winning opening winning designation command is received means that the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the gaming area. Is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation, so the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0.

Further, even when the jackpot game is in progress (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b shifts to step 012IWS119, and the gate passage counter Clear the value to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, since the fact that the jackpot game is in progress or the high base state is in the case of performing a right-handed operation, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0.

When the first left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the first left-handed. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second left-handed notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, when the second left-handed notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the second left-handed. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS125), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second left-handed notification flag (step 012IWS127). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, it is determined that the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 is detected, that the big hit game is in progress, that the base is in a high base state, and that the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification is made. Although the case where the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the lapse of time is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10, the big hit game, and the high base state, while the second. The value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) of the left-handed notification has elapsed, and various processing modes can be considered.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full tank notification in progress flag indicating that the first full tank notification is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank notification flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the second full tank notification flag indicating that the second full tank notification is being executed is set. Confirm (step 012IWS130).

If the second full tank notification in progress flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the full tank detection command has been received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b determines whether or not the full tank flag indicating that the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is being detected is set. Confirm (step 012IWS132). If the full tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b sets the full tank flag (step 012IWS133) and measures the duration of the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate). Set the full tank timer (step 012IWS134).

If the full tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds (that is, if the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is in a full tank state for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS137). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) in the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step). 012IWS138).

If the value of the full tank timer is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). ). If the value of the full tank timer is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (that is, if the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) continues for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU012IW120b is The image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying the full tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 controls to start displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!". In this case, for example, a larger size full tank notification display may be displayed as compared with the case where the first full tank notification is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS143). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) in the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step). 012IWS144). If the second effect control CPU012IW120b is set, the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer are reset.

In this example, when the second full tank notification is executed, the case where all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the predetermined notification sound are executed is shown in the same manner as the case where the second left-handed notification is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute either all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 or the output of a predetermined notification sound, or may be configured to light only a part of the game effect lamp 9. good.

Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the full tank notification date and time (step 012IWS145). As described above, in this example, there are two types of full tank notification, the first full tank notification and the second full tank notification, but the log is only performed when the second full tank notification, which is more important, is executed. Log information is not recorded when recording in the information and executing the first full tank notification of low importance.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command has not been received (N in step 012IWS131), that is, if the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) has not been detected, the second effect control CPU012IW120b should be set. For example, the full tank flag is reset and the full tank timer is reset (step 012IWS146).

When the first full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the first full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the full tank notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the first full tank notification flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is notified of the second full tank. Check if the timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to end the display of the left-handed notification display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS152), and also controls to end the output of a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). ). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the second full tank notification flag (step 012IWS154). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 11-32 is a flowchart showing the maintenance mode process (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode in-progress flag indicating that the maintenance mode is in progress is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting checking flag indicating that the setting is being checked is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the setting confirmation display (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying a character display such as "setting is being confirmed". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), is the push button 31B turned on in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (specifically, the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input). (Whether or not) is confirmed (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is turned on, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen (step 012IWS457). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by executing the processes of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, maintenance is performed based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed while the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It is controlled by the mode, and the display of the maintenance mode menu screen is started.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N in step 012IWS456), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls to end the display of the setting confirmation display in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the display of the confirmation display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). .. For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts all the log information from the log area of the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS463). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as the history information (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation is not detected (N in step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player (n). Step 012IWS465). For example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b extracts all the setting change and setting confirmation log information from the log information stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b. (Step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to display the setting change / confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed (N in step 012IWS465), the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS468). .. If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b controls to delete the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change / confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). .. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the recovery command is received during the setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation process is completed (see N in step 012IWS043 and step 012IWS049). Controls to end the mode.

In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is terminated, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the setting value command is also transmitted (see step 012IWS047). Therefore, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode is used. May be configured to terminate.

(Setting change time recording process)
11-33 is a flowchart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012IWS212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the setting change start date and time (step). 012IWS802). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command has not been received (N in step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the setting confirmation start date and time (step). 012IWS805). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS806).

If the setting confirmation command has not been received (N in step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command has been received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, when the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b receives the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126. Is input, and the input date and time information is set as the RAM clear date and time, and the log information is stored in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, when both the setting change processing and the initialization processing are executed, the second staging control CPU012IW120b stores the setting value of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current setting value stored in the area (step 012IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the setting value command is transmitted before the initialization specification command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so that the setting value storage area of RAM012IW122b is the latest. The setting value of should be stored. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the setting change end date and time. Step 012IWS811). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the set setting change command reception flag.

In this example, by executing the process of steps 012IWS810 and S811, if the setting change process is executed, the initialization process should also be executed, but only the log information related to the setting change is recorded. However, by omitting the recording of the log information related to the RAM clear, it is possible to prevent the log information from being unnecessarily recorded.

If the initialization command has not been received (N in step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the recovery command has been received (step 012IWS812). If the recovery command has been received, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, when both the setting confirmation process and the recovery process are executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Read the current setting value stored in (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates the input date and time information with the read setting value, and stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with the input date and time information as the setting confirmation end date and time. Step 012IWS815). The second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the set setting confirmation command reception flag.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the case where the log information is not recorded is shown, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when the time is N in step 012IWS813, the date and time information may be input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the input date and time information may be used as the recovery date and time to store the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b.

(Current time setting process)
11-34 is a flowchart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the maintenance mode in-progress flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if the maintenance mode is in progress), whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set in the second effect control CPU012IW120b. (Step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has been detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS823). For example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed based on the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the current time setting screen (step 012IWS824). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the current time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS822), the waiting flag indicating that the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is waiting for recording the log information of the current time setting is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 012IWS826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the time signal has been received from the first effect control CPU012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as already described, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a, so that the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. When the current time setting information is input, a signal capable of specifying the input current time setting information is sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. In this case, in this example, the hour signal indicating the hour, the minute signal indicating the minute, the second signal indicating the second, the year signal indicating the year, the month signal indicating the month, the day signal indicating the day, and the day of the week are used. It is transmitted in the order of the indicated day signal. Further, in this example, as described above, in the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, a timer interrupt is generated every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the time signal is received (Y in step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 when it is indicated by the time signal (step 012IWS828). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 500 ms in the waiting timer for measuring the waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the standby flag (step 012IWS830).

If the waiting flag is set (Y in step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, has the second effect control CPU012IW120b received any of a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, or a day of the week signal from the first effect control CPU012IW120a? Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS832).

If any signal is received (Y in step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when a minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Further, for example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Further, for example, when a year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Further, for example, when the moon signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the month indicated by the received moon signal. Further, for example, when the day signal is received, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day indicated by the received day signal. Further, for example, when the day of the week signal is received, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day of the week signal.

If the standby timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms have elapsed since the first time signal was received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has the hour, minute, and hour from the real-time clock 012IW126. Read the date and time information for seconds, year, month, day, and day of the week (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area of the RAM 012IW 122b with these read date and time information as the time setting date and time (step 012IWS835). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the current time setting flag and the standby flag (step 012IWS836).

11-35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to set the current time, the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the hour signal, the minute signal, the second signal, the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day of the week signal are used for the first staging control every 10 ms according to the setting operation by the player. It is sequentially transmitted from the CPU012IW120a to the second effect control CPU012IW120b.

Upon receiving these signals, the second staging control CPU 012IW120b immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIGS. 11-35. As shown in FIGS. 11-35, when the time signal is received, the time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received time signal. Further, when the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. Further, when the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. Further, when the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. Further, when the moon signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received moon signal. Further, when the day signal is received 10 ms later, the day information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day signal. Further, when the day of the week signal is received 10 ms later, the day of the week information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received day of the week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, the waiting timer is set when the first hour signal is received, the waiting timer times out, and as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the hour is set. After waiting for 500 ms to elapse after receiving the signal, the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is read and recorded in the log information as the time setting date and time.

If the player further sets the current time before 500 ms has elapsed after receiving the hour signal, another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, or the like may be performed before 500 ms elapses. The information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving the year signal, the month signal, the day signal, and the day signal, but in this example, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is set at any time for each reception of these signals. Therefore, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW126 set based on the last received signal.

If the log information of the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day signal transmitted individually is recorded as log information, the log information of the current time setting becomes more redundant than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the log information of the time setting date and time is recorded after waiting until all the signals related to the time setting are received. It prevents it from becoming redundant.

In this example, in addition to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, a first effect control CPU012IW120a to which the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B is temporarily input is provided. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an input circuit for inputting detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B is provided, and hour signals, minute signals, second signals, year signals, month signals, day signals, and day signals are sequentially output from the input circuits. It may be configured to be transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. Any signal may be configured to be sequentially transmitted to the second staging control CPU012IW120b in such a form as a signal corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the second staging control board 012IW12b side is shown, but the real-time clock is configured to be mounted on the first staging control board 012IW12a side for the operation of the player. Accordingly, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a may be configured to update the date and time information of the real-time clock at any time. Then, the first effect control CPU012IW120a transmits the updated real-time clock date / time information to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b updates the counter or the like based on the received date / time information. May be configured to manage.

(Recording of power failure date and time)
FIG. 11-36 is a flowchart showing a power failure date / time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date / time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b first confirms whether or not the temporary storage enable flag indicating that the temporary storage of the date / time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 is permitted is set (step 012IWS841). ). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126 has timed out ( Step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS843). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of RAM012IW122b every 100 ms, but when the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is temporarily overwritten every 100 ms. It shall be stored in the area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the initialization designation command or the recovery command (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU012IW120b confirms whether or not the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored in the log area of the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS846). ). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b, and cuts off the read date and time information. Log information is stored in the log area of RAM012IW122b as the date and time (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization specification command nor the recovery command has been received (N in step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is turned on by other commands (however, the setting confirmation command and the setting change command are turned on). It is confirmed whether or not the command (excluding the command sometimes transmitted) has been received (step 012IWS848). If other commands are received, for example, if a fluctuation pattern command, a display result specification command, or the like is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the temporary storage enable flag (step 012IWS849). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

When the temporary storage flag is set in step 012IWS849, the temporary storage flag is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the second staging control CPU 012IW120b occurs. Then, when the effect control main process shown in FIGS. 11-16 is started due to the power-on of the gaming machine or the occurrence of a system reset, the process is reset by the initialization process of step 012IWS201.

11-37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. As shown in FIGS. 11-37, when the second staging control CPU012IW120b is running, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date / time recording process, and is determined to be Y in steps 012IWS842 to S844. By executing the process of, the date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset, the second effect control is performed. Even if the CPU 012IW120b for CPU 012IW120b returns to the activated state, it is determined to be N in step 012IWS841 of the power interruption date / time recording process, the temporary storage of the date / time information every 100 ms is not executed, and it is finally stored in the temporary area of the RAM012IW122b. Date and time information is maintained.

If the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then the power supply to the gaming machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read and the read date and time on condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received. The log information is stored in the log area with the information as the power failure date and time (see Y in step 012IWS845 and step 012IWS847). Then, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), but when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded. In this case, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the gaming machine itself is not stopped, and the initialization designation command, the recovery command, etc. from the gaming control microcomputer 100, etc. No power-on command is sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), if the initialization designation command or the recovery command is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), for example, based on the reception of other commands (excluding commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command), for example. The temporary storage enable flag is set based on the reception of the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, and the like, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the second staging control CPU012IW120b, the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs (the first). (When the power supply of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is temporarily stopped due to a system reset of the staging control CPU012IW120b), the log information of the power failure date and time is also recorded, and the game is played. There is a possibility that the log information of the power failure date and time will be recorded even though the power failure of the machine itself has not occurred. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37, the date and time when the second staging control CPU012IW120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and an initialization specification command, a recovery command, etc. It is configured to officially record the log information of the power failure date and time on the condition that the command at the time of power-on is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, on the condition that the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, it is determined that the gaming machine itself has been disconnected and the date and time of the interruption is recorded in the log information. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to record the power failure date and time in the log information based on the reception of another command transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation command or a setting change command.

Further, in this example, the log information is not recorded when the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs instead of the power failure of the gaming machine itself, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, a region for recording log information for a game machine maker is configured to be provided separately from an area for recording log information for a game store, and the date and time when a system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs is recorded as log information. It may be configured to record in the area for the gaming machine maker. With such a configuration, the log information can be used as the development information of the gaming machine maker.

Next, a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode will be described. 11-40 to 11-43 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the display screen in the maintenance mode. In FIGS. 11-40 to 11-43, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, a specific example of the display screen when the maintenance history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-40 and 11-41. When the setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, a character display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A). , The setting confirmation display is started (see steps 012IWS453 to S455). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, a character display such as "press the push button to shift to the maintenance mode" is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed, and a display prompting the operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is displayed.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode (see steps 012IWS456 to S458). As shown in FIG. 11-40 (B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays the options of "maintenance history", "setting change / confirmation history", and "current time setting", and the current time is set. It is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of the “maintenance history” is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 11-40 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-40 (C), on the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be higher. In the example shown in FIG. 11-40 (C), an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning is detected in a winning opening such as the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening, the first count switch 012IW023a or the second count The log information of the switch abnormality error indicating that the abnormality of various switches such as the switch 012IW023b is detected, the prize ball error indicating that the prize ball abnormality is detected, and the magnet error indicating that the abnormal magnetism is detected is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-40 (C), the log information indicating that the probability change failure is detected is also displayed (see steps 012IWS958 to S960).

Further, when there are a plurality of pages of the maintenance history screen, when the selection operation of the next page is performed, the process shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 11-40 (D). In the example shown in FIG. 11-40 (D), the log information of the start of the setting change and the end of the setting change (see steps 012IWS802 and S811), and the log information of the power-off date and time and the power-on date and time are displayed (step). 012IWS203, S847). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-40 (D), the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification is also displayed (see steps 012IWS117 and S145).

If there is a next page, selecting the next page will move to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 11-41 (E), and then the next page will be displayed. When the selection operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (F), the process shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen. In the example shown in FIGS. 11-41 (E), the log information of the start of the setting confirmation and the end of the setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012IWS805 and S815), and the current time is set during the maintenance mode during the setting confirmation. Log information to that effect is also displayed (see step 012IWS835).

In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read and the log information is recorded, so that the date and time may be inconsistent before and after the current time is set. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11-41 (E), the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, whereas the current time was set. It is set to 09:36:16 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, and the time is earlier than the start of the setting confirmation. As described above, in this example, even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (E). The log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-41 (F), the log information of the RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some RAM abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on to the gaming machine is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormality error occurred, the game clerk once stopped the power supply of the game machine, then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and as shown in FIG. 11-41 (E), the initial stage. Log information indicating that the conversion process has been executed is also displayed (see step IWS809).

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-42. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 11-42 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW107 of "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW107 of the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 11-42 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-42 (C), on the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other. And the latest log information is displayed in order so that it is ranked higher.

Next, a specific example of the display screen when the selection operation of the current time setting is performed during the maintenance mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43. While the setting confirmation display shown in FIG. 11-43 (A) is being displayed, the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 11-43 (B), and the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed. It is assumed that the option 012IW108 of the "current time setting" is selected and operated during the display.

When the option 012IW108 of the “current time setting” is selected, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the current time setting screen as shown in FIG. 11-43 (C). As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (C) and 11-43 (D), the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left or right, and the stick is displayed. A number for each item is selected by tilting the controller 31A back and forth. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 11-43 (C), when it is desired to change the time from 16 to 15, the stick controller 31A is tilted to the right four times to move to the time item, and the stick controller 31A is moved. It suffices to change from "16" to "15" by tilting once in the forward direction (toward the player). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

In the feature unit 012IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. May give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 012IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the ratio of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 012IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is made to the player. For example, when an even initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control to output a predetermined sound, a control to vibrate the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control to emit a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By doing so, the player's attention may be directed to others, and the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or less noticeable).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 012IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock 012IW126) is executed in a specific mode. This may suggest a setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold storage becoming 0 or the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold storage number occurs. Display control, output control of predetermined sound, light emission control of predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature unit 012IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the feature unit 012IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (A) and 11-44 (B), a security cover 012IW500B composed of a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 012IW201. The right end of the long piece 012IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 012IW201, and is set via the through port 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. The key 012IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) slides in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 012IW201 with the setting key 012IW051 covered. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released by sliding the security cover 012IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 012IW051 is covered. It can be changed from the regulated state to a state that can be released (it can be changed to a permissible state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (A) and 11-44 (B), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the protrusion dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 012IW500B with respect to the board case 012IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B has a protrusion dimension from the substrate case 012IW201. By sliding the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the board case 012IW201 until the length becomes L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), the clerk of the game hall or the like operates the setting key 012IW051 to set the pachinko game machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (B), the security cover 012IW500B is attached to the board case 012IW201 until the protrusion dimension from the board case 012IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500B will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 012IW500B covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the gaming machine frame 012IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 012IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 012IW051 is maintained by the security cover 012IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A) and 11-46 (B) as modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 012IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Between the covering position that covers the right side of the substrate case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 and the uncovering position that is rotated from the covering position, centering on the pivot axis 012IW500Cd that faces in the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 012IW003. It may be rotatably supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb sets the setting key 012IW051 on the back side. The rotation from the covered state to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 012IW051. It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted from rotating while the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covers the setting key 012IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 012IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (A), the security cover 012IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (B), the security cover 012IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 012IW500C. If the 012IW051 is not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 012IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 012IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, the security cover 012IW500C covers the setting key 012IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature unit 012IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 012IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. By opening 012IW003a, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to 11-48 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through hole 012IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 012IW003 so that the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through port 012IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated via the through port 012IW003b, a door body 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 012IW003b is provided, and when the door body 012IW003c is closed, the setting key 012IW051 is used. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 11-48 (B) and 11-48 (C), when the door body 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 012IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Since the 012IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 012IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed. And can improve security.

(Modification example 4)
Further, the information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown by the feature unit 012IW, and various log information can be recorded. 11-49 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in the modified example 4. In the fourth modification, information indicating unsuccessful setting suggestion or "unsuccessful point granting" is recorded as log information, and a case is shown in which the information is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" is a reason such as the player does not perform an operation or the operation means fails even though the execution condition of the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value is satisfied. This is log information indicating that the set value suggestion effect is not executed or the set value suggestion effect with low suggestion accuracy is executed. Further, the log information 012IW109b of "successful point granting" is not operated by the player even though the conditions for granting points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and acquiring image contents are satisfied. This is log information indicating that points were not given due to reasons such as a failure of the operating means. In this way, it may be configured to allow the benefit related to the production or the benefit related to the content to be given in some form and to record the log information thereof.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, five) is continuously assigned to either one of the starting winning openings. ) May be detected as a start port unit error error, recorded in the log information, and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration in a game machine has been detected or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave has been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Often, various modes of log information are conceivable.

As described above, according to the feature unit 012IW, the setting value is set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") having different advantages for the player. It is possible. Further, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during the game is provided, and abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game can be identifiable and displayed, and the stored contents of the storage area can be stored. Initialization processing for initialization (for example, RAM clear 1) can be executed, and when the initialization processing is executed, setting change processing for changing the setting value (for example, setting change processing) is executed. It is possible. Further, when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to identify and display that the initialization process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (E)). , RAM clear log information is displayed), When the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the setting change process is executed without displaying that it can be identified that the initialization process was executed. This can be specified and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (D), only the log information indicating the end of the setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is assumed that the initialization process is executed, but if the log information of the setting change is displayed, the initialization process is executed. Since it is self-evident, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by preventing the log information of unnecessary initialization processing from being recorded and displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary recording of log information and prevent it from becoming difficult to confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to execute a setting confirmation process (for example, a setting confirmation process) for confirming a set value, and the movement of the player is detected during the execution of the setting confirmation process. Based on this, the history information can be displayed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-43, based on the fact that the push button 31B is pressed during the display of the setting confirmation display. The maintenance mode menu screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the game control means for controlling the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the control of the effect based on the information from the game control means. (For example, a second effect control CPU012IW120b) is provided. Further, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been executed, and setting change information (for example, setting change information indicating that the setting change process is executed). , Setting change command) can be output. Further, the staging control means can display different history information identifiable depending on whether or not the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second staging control CPU012IW120b is an initialization designation command. And, based on the reception of the setting change command, the log information of the setting change completion is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 11-40 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to preferably confirm the history information.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, a history storage means (for example, a log area of RAM012IW122b) capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state) and storing history information is provided. Further, a first abnormal state (for example, a first left-handed notification state) indicating that a predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance, and a first indicating that the predetermined abnormality has a higher importance than the first abnormal state. 2 It is possible to detect an abnormal state (for example, a second left-handed notification state), and information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information, but information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected. Can be stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the first abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state) and the second abnormality (for example, the second left-handed notification state) having a higher importance than the first abnormality are described. It is detectable. Further, it is provided with a history storage means (for example, the log area of RAM012IW122b) capable of storing abnormal history information related to the game, and the history information stored by the history storage means can be identifiablely displayed (for example, FIGS. 11-40 and 11-40 and). As shown in FIGS. 11-41, the maintenance history screen is displayed). Further, when the second abnormality is detected, the information indicating that the second abnormality is detected is stored as history information, while when the first abnormality is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the first abnormality is detected. The information indicating that the information has been sent is not stored as history information (for example, the log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and the log information is not recorded even when the first left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of log information is also limited, if it is recorded as log information before the first abnormality, which is less important, the history of necessary abnormalities may disappear at an early stage. In, since only the second and higher values with high importance are recorded, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification for two is satisfied. The execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

In this example, the case where the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition of the first left-handed notification is satisfied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition of the first left-handed notification continues for a predetermined period, it is determined that the execution condition of the second left-handed notification is satisfied, and the second left-handed notification is executed. May be good.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality has been detected and that the second abnormality has been detected (for example, the first left-handed notification and the second left-handed notification are executed). ). In this case, the detection of the first abnormality can be notified by a predetermined mode, and the detection of the second abnormality can be notified by a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, in the first left-handed notification). Only the left-handed notification display is displayed, and in the second left-handed notification, in addition to the left-handed notification display, all the lights of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output of the notification sound are output). Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality can be detected (for example, in addition to the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state, the first full tank notification is performed. Detects the status and the second full tank notification status). Further, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected according to the detection conditions different for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are sent to the passing gate 012IW041. In the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state, the full tank state of the hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is 10 while the determination is made by detecting the passage of the game ball 5 or 10 times. Determined by whether it lasts for seconds or 30 seconds). Therefore, the history information can be suitably stored and displayed.

In this example, a case where a full tank notification is executed other than the left-handed notification is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute abnormal winning notification, magnet error notification, ball jam error notification, etc., and there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and the second notification is performed. It may be configured to record the log information only when it is executed and display it on the maintenance history screen.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, a predetermined control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) and a specific control means (for example, a specific control means) that controls based on information from the predetermined control means. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided. Further, the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms). ), Information that can identify that the power supply output by the predetermined control means has started when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, initialization designation command, recovery command). Based on the input, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the power failure date and time (for example, the log information is stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time. That is, both when the power failure of the game machine itself occurs and when the system reset of the second staging control CPU012IW120b occurs, it is possible to prevent the situation where the power failure date and time are recorded as the power failure date and time. It can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, when the power supply to the specific control means is started and the information that can identify that the power supply is started cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is set as the power failure date and time. Do not store (for example, if the initialization specification command or the recovery command is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at predetermined timings (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

In this example, the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second staging control CPU012IW120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as a temporary power failure date and time.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is stopped based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control means (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset and the date and time every 100 ms). Temporary storage of information will not be executed). Then, based on the input of the predetermined information (for example, the initialization designation command, the recovery command, and other commands) output by the predetermined control means, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is restarted (for example). , The temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information is resumed every 100 ms). Therefore, it is possible to suitably store the power failure date and time.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time is recorded as log information). If the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power-on date and time (for example, the log information of the power-on date and time before the power-off occurs is not recorded. Does not record the log information of the power failure date and time). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. That is, since there is no record that the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to prevent an abnormal state in which the date and time of the power failure is recorded.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the first control means (for example, the first staging control CPU012IW120a) and the second control means (for example, the second staging control) that controls based on the information from the first control means. CPU 012IW120b) is provided. Further, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of information regarding the change of the date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the passage of 10 ms) (for example, an hour signal and a minute signal). , Second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal in order). Further, the second control means stores the date and time change history after a specific period, which is a predetermined period or longer, has elapsed since the input of a part of the information regarding the date and time change (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in 35, wait until 500 ms have elapsed after receiving the time signal, and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control means changes the internal date and time information each time the information regarding the change of the date and time is input (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the second control means receives the information. Immediately set the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day signal). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, when the second control means inputs the information regarding the change of the date and time multiple times before the lapse of the specific period, the second control means sets the date and time based on the information regarding the change of the date and time lastly input. Store the change history (for example, if an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, or a day signal is further received before 500 ms elapses, the change history is stored based on the last received signal. The log information of the time setting date and time is recorded based on the date and time information of the set real-time clock 012IW126). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (E), the current time is set on the maintenance history screen. Display the log information to the effect that it was lost). Further, according to the changed date and time, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real-time clock 012IW126 and the log information is recorded as the time set date and time). Therefore, the change history of the date and time can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, the second control means stores the history information according to the order in which the abnormalities related to the game occur regardless of the change of the date and time (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (E)). , Even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store the history information of the abnormality.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball wins in the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). (For example, control to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). Further, the specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific information (for example, the log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. .. Therefore, information can be suitably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can be recorded, and information can be suitably stored.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, it is possible to give a profit related to the production or a profit related to the content (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-49, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and "point grant failure". ”Log information 012IW109b is recorded). Therefore, information can be suitably stored.

In this example, regarding profit, when V prize is not established and probability change is not established, when setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when point grant is unsuccessful, log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to perform a character game that shifts to a big hit game based on a game ball winning in a specific area (V winning area) in the character, the game ball wins in the V prize area. If not, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, the log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the display of an image having a low appearance frequency or the output of sound is expected to be displayed or not output. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the push order is incorrect while the push order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects of "profit" can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, specific information can be recognizablely displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (C), information on a probable / unsuccessful tool can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. , As shown in FIGS. 11-49, the log information 012IW109a of "setting suggestion failure" and the log information 012IW109b of "point grant failure" are displayed on the maintenance history screen). Therefore, the information can be suitably displayed.

In this example, the case where the log information of the probability change failure date and time, the setting suggestion failure, and the point grant failure is displayed on the maintenance history screen is shown, but it may be configured not to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Then, the gaming machine maker may confirm what kind of trouble has occurred and configure it so that it can be used for the development of gaming machines and the like.

Further, according to the feature unit 012IW, information including specific information can be output as a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code including log information of a probability change failure date and time is generated and displayed). Therefore, information can be suitably output.

In this example, the case where the log information is recorded in association with the date and time information including both the date and the time is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the log information may be recorded in association with the date information including only the year, month, and day, or the log information may be recorded in association with the time information including only the hour, minute, and second. May be good. As such, various modes can be considered as a method of recording log information. Similarly, in the feature unit 012IW, the “date and time” is not necessarily limited to the case where both the date information and the time information are included, but also includes the case where only the date information is included, and also includes only the time information. It is a concept that includes cases.

Further, the feature unit 012IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the set value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the gaming machine was started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having (a part for executing S034 and S048) is described, and according to this feature, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set as one of the setting values. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be configurable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 012IWS026, S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025. Control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 012IWS035 to S042 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 012IWS048. Although the case where the recovery process of step 012IWS049, S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be possible to control whether or not the operation switch is enabled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the gaming machine was started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 012IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. The part that executes S034 and S048) and
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, an advantage for the player. It is possible to preferably perform processing in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100).
It is described that the operation means may be combined with the operation means, so that the increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used in combination as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost. can.

In this example, by using the clear switch in combination, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, so the clear switch must be turned on first when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The RAM clear flag is set when it is detected, and after that, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set, and the set value is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be appropriately performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the operation means has been operated based on the state of the operation means being switched from the off state to the on state is provided.
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the game control microcomputer 100 in step 012IWS041). When Y, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). Executes step 012IWS037 when N in step 012IWS036)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs is provided.
The process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the execution of the timer interrupt process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. Step 012IWS025, S034, S048 is executed)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047, S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 012IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Steps 012IWS039 to S042 in 100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determining means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step. When it is Y in 012IWS041, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , When N in step 012IWS036, step 012IWS037 is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed even though the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-60546.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Steps 012IWS039 to S042 in 100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determining means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step. When it is Y in 012IWS041, step 012IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 , Step 012IWS037 is executed when N in step 012IWS036),
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, an advantage for the player. It is possible to preferably perform processing in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed even though the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started is provided.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times when executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process (for example, step 012IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part to do)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A portion for executing steps 012IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100, which executes initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The first state storage means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means this time is provided.
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the storage content of the second state storage means is in the on state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041).
The first state storage means stores an on state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS047, S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Step 012 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b). Does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906).
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 012IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a portion that executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is a portion that executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a set setting is provided. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Steps 012IWS510, S705, S902 are executed based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the second effect control). CPU012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In the feature unit 012IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), 11-24 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-24 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the fourth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, 11-44 to 11-47).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the fourth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fourth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is N, in step 012IWS513. When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is N, in step 012IWS513. When N in S708 and N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed),
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a set setting is provided. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), 11-24 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-24 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, 11-44 to 11-47).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fifth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the staging control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of effect patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. (Part to execute 012IWS042) and
A game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value.
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a second effect) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. A part for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the control CPU 012IW120b).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game according to the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 012IWS514, S709, S906, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a set setting is provided. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 012IWS047 and S178. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of staging can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is provided.
The suggestion staging determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM012IW122b. Steps 012IWS510, S705, S902 are executed based on the stored setting values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table. Step 012 IWS514, S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), 11-24 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion staging execution means can execute the suggestion staging at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-24 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) may be further provided, and such a configuration may be provided. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestion staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Restricting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 11-26 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is described that it may be provided with more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulating member that can regulate the operation of the operation unit (for example, curity cover 012IW500A / security cover 012IW500B / security cover 012IW500C).
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 012IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is allowed. FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, 11-44 to 11-47).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the sixth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the sixth invention described above.

It should be noted that the feature unit 012IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when it is controlled to the effect mode A, if the set value information is not input normally, The suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and if it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If not, the case where the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executably configured as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the above-mentioned sixth invention) is shown. Not limited. For example, the control method of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be used to switch whether to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state and the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the gaming state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, the configuration is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion staging executably by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and the suggestion staging is executably configured by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 012IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value command may be received, but the suggestion effect may be restricted when the received setting value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the staging control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in the above and the set value stored in the previous time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the above 4th to 6th inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered setting value such as the set value "1" or "3", a series of villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention. It may be configured to (restrict the suggestion effect).

The feature unit 012IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as an initial roll effect) is described. It is possible to give a motivation to do the game and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And initial roll production, etc.)
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a game before the start of the game is described. It is possible to make people interested in the state of the machine and give them a motivation to play the game from an early time, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for directing (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the display of odd-numbered initial rolls) may be made feasible, and such a configuration can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 11). -21 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used.)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the seventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the seventh invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), 11-24 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), 11-24 (A), (B)).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a game is played in a predetermined period. It can give motivation to do it and enhance the entertainment of the game. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (for example). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 11-7 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). The suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc. (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). A), (B))
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the eighth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eighth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestive staging executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-24 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine characterized by further including a notification means (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect is described, and this feature describes the game machine. According to this, it is possible to confirm the suggestive staging performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-24 (A), (B), etc.).
Further provided with a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, it has been executed in the past. Suggestive staging can be confirmed, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an image pickup device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the ninth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 11-26. See (D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect. A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). See D)),
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest is prevented. can do. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 11-26 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps with the dialogue image due to the production))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 6 of the tenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the tenth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player may be executed, which may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A game machine that is characterized by being further equipped with a character effect that makes it difficult to produce, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, and the game control means.
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). It is equipped with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.)
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest is prevented. can do. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion staging of the first staging mode. See FIGS. 11-26 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 11-26 ( A), (see (B)) and can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 11-26 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
It is equipped with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 31B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) to which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 8 of the eleventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eleventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eleventh invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the twelfth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, gambling is enhanced. It is possible to prevent it from going too far. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-6 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that the configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 11-6 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 10 of the twelfth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature unit 012IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (eg, variable time) for the variable display varies depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
moreover,
A profit-giving means (for example, for game control) that can give a profit to a player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball wins in a V-winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided with a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed).
The specific condition can be satisfied at least based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the probability variation jackpot is achieved).
When the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, specific information that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, log information of the probability change failure date and time) can be stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific information storage means (for example, a portion for executing steps 012IWS958 to S960 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is described, and according to this feature, gambling is enhanced. It is possible to prevent it from going too far. In addition, information can be suitably stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and with such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first large winning opening, second major winning opening 712). A game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 012IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 7 of the thirteenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

In this feature unit 012IW, the case where the set value can be set in three stages of the set value "1" to "3" is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more stages are set. It may be configured to be configurable to a value, or it may be configured to be configurable to a two-step setting value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (reliability) when the setting value is "6". It may be configured to have the highest reliability).

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for staging control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play a game by firing a gaming medium and can control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and a setting means.
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
A special variable display means that can display the variable display result by variable display of the special identification information,
Special variable display timekeeping means for measuring the special variable display period for variable display of special identification information,
An ordinary variable display means that variably displays the ordinary identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
Ordinary variable timekeeping means for measuring the ordinary variable display period, which performs variable display of ordinary identification information, and ordinary variable timekeeping means.
The means for adding game value and the means for adding game value,
An information display means capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state even when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing that can execute the processing related to the game is executed.
The interrupt process is executed when the setting confirmation state is completed, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the special variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set. The time counting of the special variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time counting of the special variable display period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is timed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set. The timekeeping of the normal variable display period is interrupted until the end, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the timekeeping of the normal variable display period is restarted.
The information display means can display information about a set value set by the setting means in the setting confirmation state.
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the launch of the game medium is restricted , and
The setting means can control the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the setting value.
Specific information that can be identified as being controlled to the setting permission state when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without ending the control of the setting permission state can be stored in the specific information storage means.
The specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased based on the end of the control of the setting permission state.
The information display means displays an error when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and the setting permission state is not controlled. Can be displayed and
When the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the error display is displayed on the information display means when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means and is controlled to the setting permission state. Without
It is possible to output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine when it is controlled to the setting permission state.
The specific signal can be output when the error display is displayed on the information display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images